Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
010.010 Introduction
Section updated:
9/1/2012
7/3/2015
Example files
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/010/010-exercise-files.zip
21:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-010-001.mp4
010.010.001
Page 2 of 390
Drawing Scale
Always draw at 1 = 1
Drawing Scale controls size of text
And space between section views in array
010.020 Toolspace
Section updated:
9/1/2012
34:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-020-001.mp4
010.020.001
123456789_2.dwg
Toolspace tabs
Prospector
Settings
Survey
Toolbox
Preview Window
Active Drawing View/MasterView
Drawing Objects Access
Points, Point Groups, Point Clouds, Surfaces, Alignments (Profiles and Sections), Sites (Grading and Parcels),
Catchments, Pipe Networks (including Interference objects), Corridors, Assemblies, Intersections, and View
Frame Groups
Data Shortcuts
Surfaces, Alignments (and Profiles), Pipe Networks, View Frame Groups
Managing Objects
Right-click on object names for Properties or Edit Current Style
Styles for each object
Object styles, label styles, table styles, commands
Other settings, criteria or rules
Setting default styles
Right-click on object collection name (header)
Edit Feature Settings
Drawing Settings and Object Defaults
Commands
Macros for creation settings
Overall Drawing Settings
Right-click on drawing name
Units and Zone (coordinates)
Transformation (coordinates)
Object Layer defaults
Abbreviations (for labels)
Ambient Settings (drawing settings)
Survey Database Access
External to any drawing
Survey Databases (per project)
Equipment Database
Survey equipment data to aid analysis
Figure Prefix Database
Point codes that have linework
Manages the linework style, layer
Linework Code Sets
Field codes that start linework
Toolbox - Extra Functionality
Report Manager
Subscription Advantage Packs and Extensions
Autodesk Labs tools
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 3 of 390
To access tools
Right-click and choose Execute
Section updated:
9/1/2012
Section updated:
9/1/2012
7/3/2015
20:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-030-001.mp4
010.030.001
AliProf4thAve.dwg
Tabs for grouping of command panels
Panels for grouping of similar command icons
Icons for starting commands
Panel Pull-downs for less frequently used commands
Minimize Arrow icon
Minimize to Panel Buttons
Minimize to Panel Tiles
Minimize to Tabs
Show Full Ribbon
Home, Insert, Annotate, Modify, Analyze, View, Output, Manage, Vault
Help Express Tools Online Add-Ins
Context Ribbons
Specific to selected object
010.040.001
AliProf4thAve.dwg
Layers manage entities
Unlimited layers and names
Control color, linetype, lineweight, line thickness, plot/no plot, on/off
On/off versus freeze/thaw-both make layers invisible
Off still computes the graphics
Freeze does not compute the graphics
Civil 3D styles use of layers
Object has a layer
Objects components can have individual layers
Different styles could have different component layers
Object layer assignment
Settings tab, right-click on drawing name, Object Layer tab
WisDOT templates have layer standards set
Anything assigned 0 layer is new since 2010
These are default layers, could be changed at object creation
Modifiers for creating unique layers for new objects
None, the object does not create a unique layer
Prefix, a unique layer with name and Value field at beginning
Suffix, a unique layer with name and Value field at end
Asterisk holds place of objects name
Object Styles in the Display tab
List of objects components
Each component has a layer option
Page 4 of 390
Section updated:
9/1/2012
Section updated:
9/1/2012
Section updated:
9/1/2012
7/3/2015
1:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-050-001.mp4
010.050.001
010.060.001
123456789_2.dwg
For plotting to scale
Layout tabs include:
The printable area of the paper
Titleblock information
Viewport(s) to display portions of modelspace
Turning on layout tabs
Right-click on model button
Choose Display
Viewports
When viewport is selected, viewport scale pop-up menu is available
Regen after changing the scale
As many viewports as you need
Can be any shape that you need
Paperspace
Titleblock
Dimensions and labels (ACAD labels)
010.070.001
123456789_3.dwg
Leaves paper, rotates model
More efficient use of paper
Free Orbit in layout viewport, outside orbit ring (maintains XY plane)
DVIEW/Twist to rotate view
Plan Production tools do this automatically
Page 5 of 390
Section updated:
9/1/2012
Section updated:
9/1/2012
7/3/2015
29:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-080-001.mp4
010.080.001
123456789_2.dwg
All commands have a typed alternative
Some typed commands are quicker than switching ribbon tabs
This is not a comprehensive list just some helpful ones
All commands have a typed alternative
Some typed commands are quicker than switching ribbon tabs
This is not a comprehensive list just some helpful ones
<ESC>
<SPACEBAR> = Enter
<F1> = Opens Help to topic you are working with
<F2> = Expands command line to a window
<F3> = OSNAPS toggle
<SHIFT> + Right-Click Temporary OSNAP Overrides
<SHIFT> + <spacebar> = selection cycling
<CTRL> + Left-click select for some labels
<CTRL> + 9 = toggles Command Line palette
<CTRL> + 3 = toggles tool palettes
Z <ENTER> E <ENTER> = Zoom Extent (Fit View)
Z <ENTER> <ENTER> = real-time zooming
P <ENTER> = Pan
<DELETE> = Erase
PL for polyline
PE for polyline edit
DI for Distance command (slightly different than ribbon version)
FILEDIA, setting should = 1
CMDDIA, setting, should =1
GEOMARKERVISIBLITY = 0
OSNAPZ = if 1 then snaps to 3D objects (x/y/z)
if 0 then snaps to X/Y but ignores elevation z
OPTIONS = opens OPTIONS dialog box
010.090.001
123456789_2.dwg
Three-button wheel mouse
Left-click = select
Right-click = context menus
Wheel operation
Roll forward/backward = zoom in/out
Click wheel = pan
Double-click wheel = zoom extents
Page 6 of 390
Section updated:
9/1/2012
Section updated:
9/1/2012
Section updated:
9/1/2012
7/3/2015
5:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-100-001.mp4
010.100.001
123456789_2.dwg
Navigation controls that follow your cursor
Sections of the wheel do different tasks
Zoom, pan, orbit, center
Open through the Navigation Bar
Different sized steering wheels depending on your preference
Set pivot point for orbits
010.110 Viewports
10:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-110-001.mp4
010.110.001
123456789_3.dwg
Divide screen into real-time windows
Individual zoom and pan control
Objects in different areas can be seen together (in context)
Configuring the screen
Corridor Section Editor is automated configuration
Manual configuration, View tab, Viewport panel, Set Viewports
In-canvas controls, minus sign
010.120.001
View Styles.dwg
Controls how objects are viewed in viewports
Can help provide visual perspective of objects
Can make visual analysis easier
Object Styles can affect how visual styles represent them
2D Wireframe
Realistic
Conceptual
2D and 3D Hidden
3D Wireframe
Sketchy, Shades of Gray, Shaded, et al
Page 7 of 390
Section updated:
9/1/2012
Section updated:
9/1/2012
Section updated:
9/1/2012
7/3/2015
4:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-130-001.mp4
010.130.001
123456789_4.dwg
Selection set across entire drawing
Speeds up selection so there is less panning
You can remove from selection by <shift> left-click
Left-click select an object
Right-click, Select Similar
<SHIFT> + left click to remove anything from set
010.140.001
123456789_2.dwg
Name and save predetermined views
Preset Views, Top, Left, Right, Isometric views
Users can create their own views in Model and Layouts
Some view settings can be recalled
Create and recall views:
View Tab, Views panel, list of views
in canvas controls, Manage Views
010.150 Xreference
21:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-150-001.mp4
010.150.001
Page 8 of 390
Attachment dialog
Location, Rotation, Scale (similar to a block)
Path Type: Relative path
Attachment versus Overlay
Section updated:
9/1/2012
15:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-160-001.mp4
010.160.001
Existing Surface.dwg
Overview
Provides selective object data for use in other files
Surfaces, alignments/profiles/pipe networks
Files must be attached to a project
Object geometry is in one file, can be referenced into many other files. Allows for different styles to be applied
to the same object in different references.
References can be used simultaneously
Control/distribution of geometry held in XML file
Data Shortcut Folder Relationship
Working Folder = Path where projects are stored (level above project folders)
Project Folder = in working folder path where project files are stored
_shortcut folder = inside Project folder, where actual data shortcuts reside
The data is in XML format
DO NOT go in here this is for Civil 3D to access/manage
If a project is moved, these locations are relative.
Data Shortcut Process
Right-click on Data Shortcuts
Set Working Folder
Right-click on Data Shortcuts
New (or Set) Project Folder
Right-click on Data Shortcuts
Create Data Shortcuts
Now that project path and folder are established, this step is repeated throughout project.
Section updated:
9/1/2012
10:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-170-001.mp4
010.170.001
Both tools for referencing data in different ways. Data Shortcuts are more Civil 3D specific. XREFs are generally more
AutoCAD entities.
Civil 3D Objects will Xref and are usable
Data shortcuts
When you need data from surface, alignment, profile or pipes
View Frames for plan and profile sheets
When object interaction is needed
XREFS
Background information
Just for labeling, but not for interaction with other objects
Data shortcuts
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 9 of 390
Section updated:
9/1/2012
11:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-180-001.mp4
010.180.001
Section updated:
9/1/2012
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
17:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-190-001.mp4
010.190.001
Status Bar
Icons..
Function Key Alternatives
Right-Click Settings
Status Bar Keys:
Constraints (CTRL-Shift-I)
Snap/Grid (<F9>)
Ortho Snap (<F8>)
Polar Track (<F10>)
OSNAP (<F3>)
3D OSNAP (<F4>)
Object Snap Tracking (<F11>)
Status Bar Keys:
Dynamic UCS (<F6>)
Dynamic Input (<F12>)
Lineweight
Transparency
Quick Properties (Ctrl+Shift+P)
Selection Cycling (Ctrl+W)
010.200.001
7:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/010/010-200-002.mp4
010.200.002
Page 10 of 390
Section updated:
7/1/2010
020.010.001
WisDOT has established standards for workflows to maximize the ability to share data across many people
involved with a project
WisDOT Civil 3D projects will consist of MANY Civil 3D Drawing files. Managing them is imperative! Sharing data
seamlessly across the Project as well as with multiple Designers is a must.
To do this, WisDOT standards outline use of :
Standard Project Folder structure and locations
Standard Drawing File names
Standard Civil 3D Object names
Civil 3D objects are shared across the multiple Drawing files using:
Data Shortcuts
XReferences
Civil 3D projects are a collection of the input files, working drawing files, and data shortcuts used to manage all the
Civil 3D data associated with a project.
WisDOT standard Civil 3D Project Template that contains the standard folder structure. This Project Template is
placed in a unique Project ID folder on your Local Area Network. The unique eight character project ID is
numerical.
Project Template - Folder Structure contains the following folders
\_shortcuts DO NOT edit files in this folder. Data Shortcuts are automatically created when you create Data
Shortcuts in Civil 3D
\BaseData this folder is home to input files as well as your topographic mapping, existing surfaces, and ortho
photos. Subfolders include
Imagery; Mapping; Other; Survey
\Design this folder is home to your Design Data. Subfolders include
AliProf; Corridors; Edgelines; Quantities; Surfaces;ViewFrameGroups
\RW this folder is home to Right of Way type files and data
\SheetsOther this folder is home to Sheets other than Plan, Plan Profile, Right of Way or Cross Section
\SheetsPlan this folder is home to Plan, Plan/Profile and Cross Section type Sheets
Drawing (DWG) File names and locations are discussed as we step through the WisDOT vBook Modules
DWG file names are suggested and are somewhat flexible. The intent is so another person can look at your Civil
3D project and tell what a DWG file contains by looking at its name. Project Folder structure is not flexible. Any
suggested changes should be given to Methods Development to include in future project template updates (with
Standard Files)
All of the topics discussed in this Module are elaborated on in great detail as you go on in the vBook content. It is
very important that you follow the suggested workflow to accomplish tasks. Things like how you store a curve for
an Alignment can be done several ways with little or no effect on the overall product. How you setup and manage
your Projects data is something all together different. Consciously not using suggested file, and object/data
management can be a cause for a headache when it comes to putting everything together in the end. Remember,
our workflows are not always the most efficient ways to accomplish a task, but a great amount of thought went into
developing workflows so everything fits together. Please talk with Methods Development staff before you modify
workflows
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
WisDOT Methods Development support.cae@dot.wi.gov
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
2:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/020/020-020-001.mp4
Page 11 of 390
020.020.002
1:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/020/020-020-003.mp4
020.020.003
Section updated:
10/1/2012
030.010.001
Intro1.dwg
This fast-paced class is intended for existing CAD users who wish to get more out of their current AutoCAD or are
migrating to AutoCAD 2012 from Microstation. All of the topics have been chosen to ease the transition to Civil 3D
2012 from Microstation, BricsCAD or a version of AutoCAD prior to 2009.
You should be working in the Civil 3D workspace.
7/3/2015
Page 12 of 390
A workspace controls how and what you see on your screen. It tracks the contents of your Quick Access
Toolbar and if you have rearranged the tabs on your ribbon.
To work with ONLY base-AutoCAD tools, you can change your active Workspace to 2D Drafting and
Annotation. To work with a mix of Civil 3D and AutoCAD tools, use the Civil 3D Workspace.
7/3/2015
Page 13 of 390
7/3/2015
Page 14 of 390
Ribbons
The ribbon interface may be new to you. Ribbons consist of tabs and panels. The ribbon allows for
more tools to be on the screen at once than the outdated toolbars and menu-type interface. The ribbon
uses tabs and panels to group together tools you will need for certain tasks.
Tabs
The tabs across the top, (Home, Insert, Annotate, Modify, Analyze, View, Output, Manage, and
Express Tools) represent different categories of tools. Each tab gives you a logical grouping of tools.
The main tab you will be working with is the Home tab.
When a tab is active, you will see the tools split into more specific categories in panels.
Panels
Panels bring specific types of commands together.
For example, lets look at the Draw Panel.
At the top of the panel are the more common tools. This panel can be expanded, as indicated by the
black dropdown arrow.
Click the black arrow to expand the panel. We see quite a few more tools.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 15 of 390
Click the thumbtack icon in the lower left of the panel to keep the expanded view.
You may notice that some of the buttons are split into a command and a dropdown.
The dropdown button gives you multiple ways to execute a command. In the example shown here,
there are multiple ways to determine the size and location of a circle.
Command Line
The command line is how you and AutoCAD communicate to each other. When the command line
reads Command it is waiting for your next instruction or selection.
Get in the habit of looking at your command line frequently! Many AutoCAD and Civil 3D commands
heavily rely on this input.
As you start typing, AutoCAD will assist you in locating the command you are after. This is referred to as
AutoComplete.
Status Bar
Just below your command line is the Status Bar. When a status bar icon is shaded blue, it means that
the feature is turned on.
From Left to Right here is a listing of what each icon represents.
7/3/2015
Page 16 of 390
InfoCenter
InfoCenter is an AutoCAD-specific web browser built into your screen. To search the online help,
Autodesk discussion groups or any of your favorite blogs, type the search item into InfoCenter and click
the binoculars icon.
The Communication center icon will check online to verify that you are using the most up-to-date version
of your software and inform you of any service packs.
This is also the toolbar where you can go directly to Help.
Viewport Controls
You will see the viewport contols in your model tab as well as when you are working in modelspace
using the viewports. This gives you a shortcut to display options, view directions, and visual styles.
For AutoCAD beginners, it is reccomended that you hide this tool. You will see where to change the
display of this element later in this chapter.
View Cube
The View Cube allows you to quickly change your view direction while keeping your eyes oriented with a
box.
By clicking on any part of the box you are taken to the correspnding view dierection in CAD.
While this is a very handy tool in 3D drafting, it has limited applications in 2D.
Navigation Bar
You will do the vast majority of panning and zooming with your mouse, however in the cases where you
need one of the navigation tools not provided by the mouse, the Navigation bar is available.
The most important command you will get to from the Navigation bar is the Zoom Window command.
To access the zoom extents tool, click the flyout in the zoom areas.
User Coordinate System (UCS) Icon
When you are working in coordinates near 0,0 the UCS icon will appear on the screen at 0,0. When you
are working far away from 0,0, the UCS icon will appear in the lower-left corner of the screen.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 17 of 390
For the duration of this class, be sure that your UCS icon appears with Y straight up and X pointing East.
Relocating or rotating the UCS is for advanced CAD users only.
Model and Layout tabs
The model tab is where you will do the vast majority of your drafting. The layout tabs are where you will
prepare your project for printing.
You will dive deeper into wotking with the layout tabs when you get into printing.
Dynamic Input
Dynamic input is on by default and is a very helpful tool. Information seen near your cursor is identical
to what you will see on the command line.
As you type, you will get the AutoComplete just as you do in the command line.
Whenever a command has multiple options, you will see the key-in version on the command line or you
can use your mouse to select from the dynamic input menu.
6:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-010-002.mp4
030.010.002
Intro1.dwg
Getting to Drawings
The first thing you will need to understand is how to open drawings. The best way to open an existing project is to
use the open icon from the Quick Access toolbar.
When you click Open, AutoCAD will take you to the most recently used directory. If this is your first time opening
up a drawing in AutoCAD it will take you to the Documents folder.
Be sure that the Files of type is set to DWG when opening a drawing. If this is showing another file type, you may
have clicked the wrong icon.
To access a recently used drawing, use the application menu. A shortcut listing of your 9 most recent files will be
listed immediately upon clicking the application menu icon. Depending on your version of AutioCAD, this may be a
big red A or a C for Civil..
As you open files, the oldest ones will drop off as new ones are added. You can force these items to stay on the
list by using the pushpin icon.
7/3/2015
Page 18 of 390
Undo
The Undo command can now process multiple Undos at once. Click on the black drop-down arrow to the right of
the undo icon for a list of the actions that can be undone. Simply drag the cursor to pick the batch you wish to
undo.
View Cube
Located in the upper-right corner of the screen, the Viewcube allows for easy navigation in 3D environments. It is a
great way to keep an eye on the orientation of the drawing. You will see the Viewcube in Object Viewer and
modelspace viewports by default. It is common to turn off the Viewcube in 2D views.
By clicking on a portion of the box, you can quickly jump to isometric views. The home icon will take you back to
the Home view, which is SW isometric by default. Right-click on the Viewcube to reset the home view to the view
of your choice. Most people use the plan view, with north as up as their home view.
Viewport Controls
Viewport controls are another shortcut that can be used to control the display of your screen. Microstation has
similar tools in the View Control toolbar. In AutoCAD, these are a series of menus that allow fast changes to what
you are seeing on screen.
The [-] menu is where you can change how many model viewports are showing at once. This is also where you can
choose to turn the Viewcube off.
The [Top] menu will change to display the view you are in. This is an additional option for controlling the direction
you are viewing your drawing.
The [2D Wireframe] menu also changes depending on what Visual Style you are in. Visual Styles control how 3D
objects re displayed. In most cases while you are designing in Civil 3D, you will be working in the 2D Wireframe
visual style.
7/3/2015
Page 19 of 390
030.010.003
Intro2.dwg
Selecting Things
It may sound simple, but knowing how to select objects efficiently in AutoCAD will make using Civil 3D much
easier.
The first thing you need to know is that if you are not actively in a command, AutoCAD is in a selection
mode.
After you are done with a command, the tool you are using is no longer active and you are back at a Command:
prompt in the AutoCAD command line.
This is very different for users who may be used to software that keeps you in a command until you switch tools
(such as Microstation).
All of the techniques discussed in this section will work outside of a command or at the Select Objects: prompt
when you start working with commands.
When you are not in a command, and you click on an object, you will see blue squares at key points. These blue
squares are called grips. If you click a grip, you can move or adjust the object.
If you are in a command, such as move, you will not see grips but you will see objects become dashed.
Window Selection
To select multiple items at once, use a selection window. Click on the screen where you have no CAD
objects and a selection window is started. Drag across your screen and you will see a temporary
rectangle forming.
The direction that you drag your selection window makes a difference. Dragging left to right across your
screen will give you a blue field with a solid line around it.
7/3/2015
Page 20 of 390
Only objects that are completely inside the blue area will become selected. Items that are partially in,
but cross the solid line are not selected.
Dragging right to left across your screen will give you a green field with a dashed line around it. Objects
inside the green area and anything touching the dashed line will become selected. Items that are
partially inside will also become selected.
Selection Cycling
Items that are drawn first tend to get covered up by items that are drawn after them. In AutoCAD this is
called Display Order. We will discuss display order later in this section.
A new addition to CAD is the selection cycling status bar icon. With this option turned on, you will be
prompted to pick an item from a list of choices.
Selecting, and then Right-clicking
It is important to get comfortable with using the right-click button on your mouse; in Civil 3D, rightclicking is very important.
Outside of a command, if you have an item or group of items selected, right-clicking will give you a list
of options that are specific to the item(s).
A very handy tool to know is the Select Similar command.
Select similar will look for objects of the same type on the same layer, and select them all in one shot.
Deleting Things
There are two main ways to erase objects in AutoCAD.
1. The easiest way is to select the objects you wish to remove, and then press the delete key.
2. If you want AutoCAD to prompt you to select Objects: use the erase command from the
modify toolbar.
Display Order
If you draw something in AutoCAD, and then draw another thing on top of the first thing, the second
thing will obscure the first thing where they overlap.
This becomes especially important when working with Civil 3D objects because you will frequently have
two objects in the same location of the XY plane.
Regardless of actual elevation, objects drawn on top of each other (i.e. they share the same XY space)
will take precedence over the items drawn before them. For instance, if cycle for selection isnt working,
use the Display order commands to get to the objects you want.
Select the object you wish to work with. Right-click and select display order.
Bring to Front takes the selected object and puts it in front of other objects that intersect it.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 21 of 390
2. Use a left- to right crossing window to select the three green polylines closest to station 0+00 in
the drawing.
Note that this type of selection window only captures objects that are completely inside of the
box.
3. Press ESC to de-select the objects.
4. In the same location, use a Right-to-left crossing window to select objects.
This time, many more objects become selected.
5. Press ESC to de-select the objects.
6. Click on any one of the blocks representing a tree.
7. Right-click and pick Select Similar.
All of the trees become selected, as long as they are:
On the same layer
Have the same block name.
8. Press ESC to de-select the objects.
You should not have any items selected.
9. In the same area of interest, select one of the white/black lines.
10. Right-click and pick select similar.
11. Press DELETE on your keyboard.
Depending on which line you originally selected, your result may vary. Some of the lines are
actually polylines and some are segments of large radius arcs.
Pressing the delete key on your keyboard will remove the items you had selected.
12. Select one of the small circles in the area of interest and one of the remaining lines.
Both objects are selected.
13. Right-click and pick select Similar.
All the circles and like lines will become selected.
14. From the Home tab, Modify panel, click the Erase icon.
The selected objects are deleted.
15. Repeat the previous steps to delete the remaining extraneous objects.
The drawing should appear cleaner.
16. Turn on the Cycle for Selection status bar icon.
Cycle for Selection is now on.
17. Click one of the ROW lines.
Cycle for selection window reveals that there are multiple objects hiding under the ROW lines.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 22 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
13:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-020-001.mp4
030.020.001
Dynamic Input.dwg
Introduction
Before you can truly understand the AutoCAD coordinate system and units, it will help to know several drawing
tools.
You will be working with the Line tool and Rectangle tool, both of which are located on the Home tab > Draw panel.
You will need to click the line tool fly-out and select Create Line. Notice there are many surveyor and civil-friendly
ways to define your lines.
As you move your cursor around, you will see the dynamic input display your current coordinate. When you first
start the line command, the first click establishes the start point of the line.
After you commit the first endpoint to the drawing, the dynamic input cursor changes slightly. The tool now shows
your distance and angle away from the previous click location.
The second click establishes the second point on the line and so on.
When you want to exit the Line tool, press enter on your keyboard.
7/3/2015
Page 23 of 390
7/3/2015
Page 24 of 390
030.020.002
DrawTools1.dwg
Drawing Lines, Polylines and 3D polylines
The differences between lines, polylines and 3D polylines are significant to the Civil 3D world. All of these
commands are located on the Home tab...Draw panel
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 25 of 390
Lines
An AutoCAD line is any two points in space.
A line can have differing elevations at each end.
The differing elevations may be a result of snapping to nodes of different elevation.
Be aware that a chain of single lines will not join if they have a Delta Z value other than 0.
Also, if you convert a line to a polyline, check the resulting polyline elevation. The result may be unexpected,
as polylines can only be at one elevation.
Polylines
You may not realize it, but you have already been working with polylines. The rectangles you used in the previous
section are just a special case of a polyline. The term Polyline refers to a 2D polyline. A 2d polyline is a chain of
line segments and/or arcs at the same elevation.
A polyline can be at an elevation, but every vertex is at the same elevation.
When you start the polyline command, if you happen to snap to something at an elevation, the rest of your line will
all be at the same elevation.
3D Polylines
A 3D polyline is also a chain of line segments, but it cannot contain arcs. Each vertex of a 3D polyline can be at
different elevations.
You can edit each vertex independently through the properties.
When you get into Feature Lines in Civil 3D, there are much slicker ways to set elevations.
7/3/2015
Page 26 of 390
not visible in plan view. If you dont wish to change the object type, use NO when asked to remove
hidden lines.
Circles
Drawing Circles is one of the most fundamental aspects of working in AutoCAD.
If you go directly for the main circle icon, you will get the most simple version of the tool.
Simply click or type in the coordinates of the radius point, then Key-in or click to set the radius distance.
Many variations of the circle command exist, depending on how you wish to fit the circle into your
project.
Arcs
Like circles, the arc tool has many variations, depending on what info you are given ahead of time.
AutoCAD creates arcs in a counterclockwise fashion - keep this in mind as you draw.
Working with arcs is one of the few places where it can be advantageous to turn off dynamic input. F12
key on your keyboard will toggle on or off dynamic input on the fly.
Civil 3D users have additional arc tools that do not exist in base-AutoCAD.
The end result of these tools is still an AutoCAD arc, but users often find that these fit a civil drafting
scenario more than the traditional AutoCAD arc tools.
Exercise: Starting to Draw
As you draw, you will be given coordinates, lengths and angles with which to draw your objects. All the
keying-in may seem cumbersome - but it is good practice. In the next segment, you will learn some
tools that will eliminate the need for so much typing.
1. Open the drawing called DrawTools1.dwg
In case you are wondering: Yes - theres a much easier way to accomplish the following drawing task.
However, I want you to get the feel for the Dynamic input and getting used to looking at either the
command line or the tooltips for feedback.
2. Turn your Dynamic Input on in the status bar.
3. Start the polyline command.
4. When prompted for the start point, Key-in 500,500 ENTER.
5. When prompted for the next point on the line, Key-in 100 TAB 0 ENTER.
6. Hit the down arrow on your keyboard and select Arc. (Alternately, you can type in A and press
ENTER)
7. Key-in 40 TAB 45. Because you have dynamic input on, pay attention to the location of your
cursor when you Key-in the 45 angle.
Hint: If you goof, you can always type U for UNDO at the command line. Using Undo from within
a command will only undo one step. If you press escape and press the main undo, you will
remove the entire polyline and will need to start over.
8. Hit the down arrow on your keyboard and select Line. (Alternately, you can type in L and press
ENTER)
9. Make sure your cursor is below the last point you drew dynamic input is on. Key-in 100 TAB 90
ENTER.
10. Press ESC when done. Your drawing will resemble the following image
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 27 of 390
15. Zoom into the NW quadrant of the intersection. Because base-AutoCAD arcs always want to go
counter clockwise use the endpoint object snap (the green square thing) to select the first point as
shown below.
16. You are now prompted for the center of the arc. Use the endpoint snap again to select where
the two grey construction lines come together at a 90 degree angle
17. You are now prompted for the endpoint of the arc, click where the curve should end, at the
endpoint of the vertical line. The first arc is now complete.
18. Click the arc tool again, but this time, choose Start, Center Angle.
19. Click the vertical line in the SE quadrant to start the arc.
20. Click the center as the intersection of the construction lines.
21. Type in 90 ENTER as the included angle.
The completed arc will look like the following image.
22. Use the arc tool of your choosing to complete the SE quadrant.
End of Exercise.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
11:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-030-001.mp4
030.030.001
oSnaps.dwg
Object Snaps enable you to quickly select exact geometric points on existing entities without having to know the
exact coordinates of those points.
Use object snaps to draw more precisely. You can make sure that object truly touch or are drawn the way you
intended.
The most common object snaps youll use are endpoint, midpoint, center, node and intersection.
If you right-click on the OSNAP icon at the bottom of your screen youll see a list of the available snaps.
The object snaps highlighted in blue are referred to as Running snaps. All running snaps are active when the
object snap icon is turned on in the command line.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 28 of 390
Later in this chapter you will examine working with object snaps that we are leaving unchecked here.
7/3/2015
Page 29 of 390
23:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-030-002.mp4
030.030.002
oSnaps.dwg
Some of the most useful object snaps are ones that are generally not used as running object snaps. The snaps you
will use in this section are usually accessed through object snap overrides.
Object snap overrides are object snaps that are only active for one click. AutoCAD filters out all other object snaps
until you complete the action.
Object snaps commonly used with Osnap Overrides
Mid Between Two Points
This is more of a snap tool than a true object snap. Mid Between Two points leverages your running snaps to find
a midpoint where there is no object. For example, in the image to the left, a circle was drawn exactly halfway
between the end points of the lines. Using the Mid Between Two points option eliminates the need to draw a
temporary construction line for this purpose.
Quadrant
Quadrant object snap will help you find the 3 oclock, 6oclock, 9 oclock and 12 oclock positions on any circle or
arc.
Tangent
The tangent snap helps you find the point where a line touches, but does not pass through, a circle or an arc. If
you are drawing the line from an arc to another point, you will initially see the deferred tangent symbol. Deferred
tangent means that AutoCAD needs more information from you to find the final location of the line.
Perpendicular
If you need to draw perpendicular to a non-standard angle, the perpendicular object snap will come in handy.
Note: There is a parallel object snap but it tends to be cumbersome to use. Later in this class, we will use the
offset command, which does a better job creating parallel lines.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 30 of 390
Node
Some users find the node Snap helpful if working with AutoCAD points. Many blocks contain AutoCAD points so
the node snap may be useful when snapping to a point of interest that is not handled by other snaps.
Nearest
Nearest is a catch-all object snap that selects any point on an object. Be careful, as the nearest snap has no
regard for maintaining regular angles.
How to Access Object Snap Overrides
To access these snaps you must be in the middle of a drawing command. Press the SHIFT key on your keyboard.
If you hold the shift key for a moment you will notice a symbol pop up indicating it is ok to continue.
At that point right-click your mouse to show the object snap override menu.
Select the object snap that you want active for the proceeding click. The object snap you choose will only be
active, and all other object snaps will be temporarily disabled for one click.
Why Use Object Snap Overrides
Many people ask, Why not just turn on all the object snaps as running snaps? Some object snaps interfere with
other snaps. For example, a quadrant snap may be very close to a tangent location on a circle. By accessing
these as overrides, it is easier to pinpoint the location you are after.
Additionally, by only keeping your most frequently used object snaps as running snaps and using the object snap
overrides for more exotic snaps, you will decrease the amount of clutter on your screen.
There is a lot to pay attention to while you are drafting and more information on screen isnt always better.
7/3/2015
Page 31 of 390
7/3/2015
Page 32 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
8:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-040-001.mp4
030.040.001
Polar Tracking.dwg
Polar tracking allows you to draw or move an object in a specific direction without using ortho mode or angular
key-ins at the command line. When the option is highlighted on the status bar, you will automatically get polar
tracking lines at 90 intervals.
If you see the tracking line with your cursor, you can simply type the distance at the command line, then enter.
Without polar tracking turned on, you would need to use the tedious notation of @20<90 to denote a distance of
20 at 90.
How to Use Polar Tracking
Whenever you see the polar tracking line on the screen, you can simply enter a numeric distance, then enter (or
spacebar) on your keyboard to enter a distance.
In other words, you do not need to enter 10 TAB 90 to make a 10 unit line going due north. With polar tracking on
you can just key-in 10 ENTER.
If your mouse is too far away from the polar tracking position, the dashed line will disappear. Typing in an angle,
as you did previously will always override polar tracking.
Never rely on the display angle to set your angles. The number displayed on the tool tip round to the nearest whole
angle. The 75 you see here could be anything from 74.5 to 75.4.
To set the polar tracking angle to a value other than 90 degrees, right click the polar tracking icon and select from
the frequently used angles.
Exercise: Polar Tracking at 90 degrees
In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by drawing using the polar tracking feature.
Use 0,0 as the starting point. The dimensions are shown for guidance purposes only. (You will learn how to create
dimensions later in this course.)
Feel free to attempt this exercise without reading the step-by step directions. If you need more guidance, the stepby-step directions will help you finish the exercise.
1. Open the drawing called Polar Tracking.dwg
This simple drawing will allow you to practice using polar tracking drawing tool.
The only thing in this drawing is the start here leader.
2. Verify that your Polar tracking tool is turned on in the status bar.
3. Start the Line command.
4. For the start point, key in 0,0.
The line should start exactly at the arrowhead of the Start here arrow.
5. Drag your mouse straight up.
6. With the polar tracking line displayed, key in 6 ENTER
The first vertical line is formed.
7. Push your mouse left to get a polar tracking line at 180.
8. Key in 1.5 ENTER
The horizontal line forming the top of the beam guard is formed.
9. Slide your mouse to the down so that the polar tracking line forms at 90 south
10. Key in 1.5 ENTER
The third line is formed.
11. Slide your mouse right.
12. Key in 1 ENTER
13. Slide your mouse down.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 33 of 390
030.040.002
PolarTracking2.dwg
Polar tracking is extremely useful even if it were always left at 90 angles. However, polar tracking can be used at
any angle you need.
To change the active polar tracking angle, right-click on the polar tracking icon. The angles seen in the immediate
listing are all multiples of 360 and are referred to as increment angles. Increment angles will show up everywhere
the multiple occurs. For instance, if we set the increment angle to 22.5, you will see a polar tracking angle at 0,
22.5, 45, 67.5, 90, 112.5, 135, and so on.
If you need an angle that is not listed in the increment angle list, you will need to go to the polar tracking settings.
Additional Angles
To add an additional angle, place a checkmark next to the Additional Angles box in the Polar Tracking Settings.
Click New to add the angle of your choice.
Additional angles only once around the clock unlike increment angles. For example, if you set your additional
angle to 35 you will only see angle 35. If you wish to see 35, 70, 105 and so on, you would need to add them as
well.
Additional Settings
The Object Snap Tracking Settings and Polar Angle Measurement are usually left as default.
Object Snap Tracking is a tool we will discuss in the next chapter. The control here determines how polar tracking
related to Object snap tracking.
Polar Angle Measurement determines how polar tracking relates to the last object you drew while a command is
active.
Consider the following example where a line is drawn at 10 from due East (0).
With the setting changed to Relative to last segment, the increment angle kicks in 45 from the original 10,
resulting in an overall angle of 55. The need for this option depends on your situation, but is not needed in most
day-to-day drafting.
Exercise: Polar Tracking at Additional Angles
In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by drawing by changing the increment angle as
part of the polar tracking feature.
You will draw the arrow, using the Start here arrowhead as the starting point. The dimensions are shown for
guidance purposes only. (You will learn how to create dimensions later in this course.)
Feel free to attempt this exercise without reading the step-by step directions. If you need more guidance, the stepby-step directions will help you finish the exercise.
Hint: You will need to set your increment angle to 30
1. Open the drawing called PolarTracking2.dwg
This simple drawing will allow you to practice using polar tracking drawing tool. The only thing in this
drawing is the start here leader.
2. Set the Increment angle to 30.
3. Start the polyline command. Key in 10,0 for the start point.
The line is started at the same spot as the start here label.
4. Pull your mouse to the left of where it currently sits.
You will see a polar tracking line automatically appear at 0.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 34 of 390
5. Key in 2 ENTER.
The first line of the arrow is created.
6. Push your mouse up to get a tracking line at 90.
7. Type in 10 ENTER
8. To draw the point of the arrowhead, position the polar tracking so that the angle you see is 120.
9. Save the Drawing. End of exercise.
9:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-040-003.mp4
030.040.003
oSnap-Track.dwg
Object snap tracking
Many functions in AutoCAD 2012 exist to eliminate the need for unnecessary construction lines. In most cases, if
you dont need to plot it, you dont need to draw it.
The Object Snap tracking tool is a perfect example of a tool that will help you draft more efficiently and accurately
without the need for construction lines.
To work with object snap tracking, both object snaps and the object snap tracking status bar icons must be active.
Polar tracking is also helpful when using object snap tracking - as the two can work together.
Say you are working with these perpendicular lines and would like to complete the formation of a rectangle using
the line command.
You start the line command and use the traditional endpoint snap to start the line. To place the other endpoint of
the line (without knowing the measurement ahead of time) object snap tracking is a huge help.
As shown in the image to the left, to activate object snap tracking, you will sweep your cursor (without clicking)
until the location you want to line up with is picked up by your object snaps.
As you move your cursor away, a tracking line will form.
If you move your cursor too far away, the tracking line will hide, but you will see a tiny plus (+) sign left behind.
If you do not see the plus sign, try again. If you accidentally sweep over the same point twice, it will clear the
tracking point.
As you move your cursor down, eventually AutoCAD will show you where the polar tracking line and object tracking
line intersect. As long as you see the tracking lines, a click will place the endpoint exactly where these two
temporary tracking lines intersect.
It takes a little bit of practice to get the hang of object snap tracking, but I guarantee this is a tool that you will use
over and over throughout your drafting day.
Lets take a look at another example.
Working with a rectangle, say you wish to draw a circle exactly in the center.
Start the circle command, but do not click. Sweep your cursor against the first midpoint to activate the tracking
point.
Sweep your cursor up to the second tracking point - still no clicking yet.
Notice the blip left behind by the first sweep to the midpoint - that means AutoCAD is still tracking that location for
us.
As you pull your cursor toward where the approximate location should be for the center of the rectangle, the
tracking lines will appear and help you locate your position.
Notice how the snap tracking lights up the midpoints of both the lines you are working off of.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 35 of 390
NOW you can click and place the circle at the location you were aiming for. You can turn off object snap tracking
by pressing the F11 key.
Exercise: Object Snap Tracking
In the exercise that follows, you will apply what you have learned by completing the drawing as shown.
Remember orthographic projections from manual drafting? This example forces you to use object snap tracking by
leveraging the projection lines as a guide to locating the missing geometry.
You will need polar tracking on and set to 90 degrees.
You will need object snaps on
Intersection
Endpoint
midpoint
You will need object snap tracking on.
1. Open the drawing called oSnap-Track.dwg
Drawing contains some cad elements that you will be working off of. The geometry in green represents a
manhole. The grey lines are construction lines that will help you draw. You will need to produce the side
view of the manhole using object snap tracking.
2. Start the rectangle command.
To find the first point of the rectangle, use the endpoint of the existing lines and the endpoint of the
projection lines.
3. To find the second corner of the rectangle, use the projection lines.
4. Do not click until you see the crossing guidelines on the screen.
The result should be a single rectangle that lines up perfectly with the side below it and the projection
lines.
5. Start the circle command.
6. Use polar tracking from the middle of the new reactangle and the middle of the small rectangle on the right
to find the center of the circle. Click to start the circle.
7. To find the diameter of the circle, use object snap tracking from the top of the small rectangle.
Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
15:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-050-001.mp4
030.050.001
Grips.dwg
Using Grips to Modify Objects
Selecting an object without a command active will result in CAD displaying grips on the object.
Grips are a quick and easy way to modify any AutoCAD object.
When a grip is clicked, it turns red to indicate it is active, or hot.
A hot grip can be used to relocate an endpoint, as shown in the illustration.
7/3/2015
Page 36 of 390
In this case, the dynamic input shows the overall radius of the circle. Use tab to change to the radius change field.
7/3/2015
Page 37 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
11:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-001.mp4
030.060.001
MOVE-COPY-ROTATE.dwg
Introduction to Modify Commands
In this chapter you will learn about Move, Copy and Rotate, the three most common Modify tools you will
encounter. As you work through the example, ask yourself the following questions as you work:
What items are selected when I start the command? How does this affect the behavior of the tool?
Move
Example Workflow: Move
1. Hit ESC several times to ensure you are out of any other commands. This will also ensure that you do not
have any objects selected.
2. Click the Move command.
3.
4. You are prompted to Select Objects:
5.
6. Use a crossing window to select the objects you wish to move.
7.
8. Right-click to move on to the next step.
9.
10. The command line now reads:
Specify base point or [Displacement] <Displacement>:
1. The base point is referring to the location you are moving the objects from.
2. The second point is where you are moving the objects to.
When the second click is complete, the command is finished.
When you finish working with an AutoCAD command, you are taken back to a command line prompt. When you
see the word Command: at the prompt you know you are in a selection mode.
If you want to restart a command again right away, right-click and select Repeat
If an object (or several objects) are already selected at the time you start the command, it will skip past the option
to Select Objects. For example, if I had the suitcase objects selected at the time I clicked Move, it would jump me
to step 6.
Copy
Example Workflow: Copy
1. Click the Copy command.
2. You are prompted to Select Objects:
3. Use a crossing window to select the objects you wish to move.
4. Right-click to move on to the next step.
5. The command line now reads:
Specify base point or [Displacement] <Displacement>:
1. The base point is referring to the location you are moving the objects from.
2. The second point is where the duplicate object will appear.
6. Your command line now says:
Specify second point or [Exit/Undo] <Exit>:
You can keep making copies of your objects.
7. Hit enter when you are done making copies.
Rotate
Example Workflow: Rotate
1. With no objects selected, click the Rotate tool.
2. The command line now asks: Select Objects:
3. Select the object or objects you wish to rotate.
4. Right-click when you are done selecting entities to rotate.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 38 of 390
5. You are now asked: Specify base point: Use object snaps to select the base point.
6. You are now asked to Specify a rotation angle. The default options allow you to type in a rotation angle or
graphically select the rotation angle. If you type in a rotation angle, hit enter to finish the command.
By default, AutoCAD considers due East = 0.
When we get into AutoCAD there are more options for specifying angles (such as bearing), so if the angle defaults
in AutoCAD bug you, dont worry!
Exercise: Move/Copy/Rotate
You will use what you have learned to edit the following drawing.
You will use Move, Copy and Rotate to place pavement markings in the configuration shown here.
Use the cyan points as your placement guide.
If you feel confident enough to try the exercise without step-by-step instructions, Go for it!
It will be helpful to have your Node object snap on.
1. Open the Drawing MOVE-COPY-ROTATE.DWG .
2. Remember that you can turn on/off polar tracking with F10. You can turn on/off object snap tracking using
F11. You can turn on/off object snaps using F3. You will leverage all three of these tools as you move, copy
and rotate.
3. Start the move command. Select the pavement marking arrows using the midpoint of the bottom of the
arrow as the Base Point.
4. Snap to the south most Node in the S approach to the intersection.
5. Start the copy command. Copy the pavement marking arrows by clicking at the midpoint of the bottom (as
you did before).
6. Place a copy of the arrows at each node as shown here:
7. Note each quadrant of the intersection has a point representing the location of the pavement marking
arrows.
8. Start the rotate command. Start with the arrows at the east approach. Use the node (or the midpoint of the
bottom of the arrows - as these two points should coincide) as the basepoint.
9. Specify a rotation of 90. The arrows will then be pointed the same direction.
10. Continue moving, copying and rotating until the pavement marking placement on the intersection is
completed.
11. When moving the Crosswalk and stop bar, line up the bottom corner of the stopbar with the node closer to
the intersection.
Save and close the drawing. End of exercise.
19:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-002.mp4
030.060.002
Polyline edits.dwg
More Modify Commands
In this chapter:
Join
Polyline Edit
Explode
Once you locate these commands on the Modify Panel, the only learning curve working with the tools is getting
used to the order in which you do your clicking and picking.
Keep an eye on the command line to help steer you in the right direction.
As you will see in the first example, you can pick objects before initiating the command or wait until AutoCAD asks
you to Select Objects.
7/3/2015
Page 39 of 390
If you have drawn many line segments that touch perfectly, you can use the Join command directly from the Modify
pull-down.
To use Join:
1. Select the lines and arcs you want to combine into a polyline.
2. Click the Join command.
OR
1. Click the Join command.
2. Select the objects you wish to join.
3. Press enter to complete the command.
If the lines were not drawn using object snaps, there may be very tiny gaps between the segments. If this is the
case, you will need to use the Polyline edit command to join your line.
Using Polyline Edit to Join:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The command line will report to you how many segments were added to the polyline. If fewer segments were
added than you expected, try the process again with a larger fuzz distance.
Explode
There are some situations where you want to break apart an AutoCAD object into components that make it up. For
example, you may wish to turn a polyline into several line segments. You may wish to turn a block into regular
lines. To break down an object into smaller parts explode can be used.
Use Explode with caution. Using explode on a objects in Civil 3D will remove the intelligent information behind it,
leaving you with just the graphical representation.
Erase
We briefly discussed the Erase command earlier in this course. There are two main ways to erase objects in
AutoCAD.
1. The easiest way is to select the objects you wish to remove, and then press the delete key.
2. If you want AutoCAD to prompt you to select Objects: use the erase command from the modify toolbar.
Distance Inquiry
Distance Inquiry is not a modify command but it will be used in the upcoming example to check your work.
It is handy to know the distance between two spots. I like the DI command to get a quick measure of the line or
space Im interested.
Type DI at the command line for a quick one-off measurement.
As you see here, you will get the overall angular distance as well as the X, Y and Z distances.
You will use distance inquiry in the exercise to ensure that the fuzz distance you specify in the PEDT-Join
command is large enough to plug the gaps in the polylines.
Exercise: PEDIT/Join/Explode/Erase
You will use what you have learned to edit the following drawing. You will use explode, Join and Polyline edit to
make the modifications. If you successfully complete this exercise you can use it in the next one.
1. Open the drawing Polyline edits.dwg .
This drawing contains several shapes that appear to be closed. Upon closer inspection you will see that
the elements are not joined.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 40 of 390
Without being in a command, move your cursor over the drawing. You will notice that more elements
light up than you might expect. This is because the entire drawing is a block.
2. With the block selected, click Explode
Now as you mouse over the items, they behave as separate line segments.
3. Select all the line segments that make up Building1. Click Join. The command line will report that 19
lines have now been converted to 2 polylines.
4. Use join again to join the remaining segments.
On selecting, all of building 1 will be a single polyline, open on one segment.
5. Double click the polyline. Select close from the polyline edit options.
6. Press escape.
The building polyline is now closed.
7. Zoom into building2. Select all the objects (including the protrusion on the right side).
8. Try the Join command on this line.
9. It will report that 1 line was discarded from the selection set.
10. With NO object selected, start the PEDIT command from the Modify panel.
11. Use M to start the Multiple option.
12. Select the polyline and the discarded line from the previous steps.
13. Select the JOIN option.
14. For Fuzz Distance, enter 1 foot.
15. The last line is now part of the polyline. You are still in the polyline edit command. Select close.
16. Building2 footprint is now complete.
17. Repeat these techniques to join the polylines for Building3. At the end of the process, Building 3 will be a
closed, continuous polyline as shown.
Save the drawing.
16:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-003.mp4
030.060.003
Offset-Array.dwg, Scale-Stretch.dwg
Even More Modify Commands
In this chapter you will be learning how to modify the new object you create.
In this chapter:
Offset
Mirror
Scale
Stretch
Trim/Extend
Break
Fillet
Chamfer
Offset
Example Workflow: Offset
1. With no objects selected, click the Offset tool.
2.
3. The command line now reads:
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 41 of 390
The offset command adjusts the geometry of the line to get a consistent distance between the original and offset
line. This means that arcs will have different radii in the offset object.
Mirror
The mirror command is a special version of the copy command that flips objects over an imaginary mirror line.
Select Objects first or after the Mirror command is started.
You will be prompted to select two points that form an imaginary mirror line. This mirror line determines the angle
and distance away from the original the flipped copy is made.
Polar tracking and the mirror command are frequently used together.
One of the options in the mirror command is to Erase Source objects. The default is N for No. If you choose to key
in Y for yes, the original will be deleted. This option is a convenient way to flip objects without duplicating them.
7/3/2015
Page 42 of 390
Stretch
The Stretch command and polar tracking are frequently used together.
Start the Stretch command by clicking the Stretch icon from the Home tab > Modify panel
When you are prompted to select objects, it is important to pay attention to the window you create.
You must use a right-to-left crossing window when working with Stretch.
Items that are completely inside the crossing window will move. Items that cross the dashed selection boundary
will act like rubber-bands. These are the objects that stretch when you proceed with the command.
Do not use a right-to-left crossing window.
Like all of the modify commands, after selecting objects you are prompted for a base point.
The base point on the stretch command can be anywhere on the object. The location of the base point will not
affect the outcome of the command. Rather, the base point is used as a start point when specifying a stretch
distance.
Using polar tracking, you can manually stretch the item and click to complete the command.
You can also key-in a stretch distance. If you do not use polar tracking the result is a skewed geometry.
Scale
The scale command is used to resize items uniformly. You will find the scale command with the rest of the modify
commands on the home tab.
Start the scale command and select objects or have objects selected ahead of time and click the scale icon. (Like
all the modify commands, if you have an item selected to begin with, the command will skip the step to Select
objects.)
You are prompted to specify a base point. In the case of scale, the base point acts as an anchor. This base point
will stay put, while the rest of the object grows or shrinks around it. After the base point is set, you will want to
key-in your scale value.
Moving your cursor will increase or decrease the size, however, the distance away from your base point is taken as
a scale factor, which can be confusing.
You should always key-in your scale factor. A scale factor greater than 1 will increase the size of the item. A
scale factor less than 1 will result in a smaller item.
Scale factors in use with the Scale command are always positive numbers.
Exercise: Scale/Stretch
You will use the scale and stretch commands to fix the drawing that follows.
1. Open the drawing Scale-stretch.dwg Zoom into the area in the NW of the site shown here.
2.
3. Start the stretch command.
4.
5. Start a R to L crossing window to select objects.
6.
7. Press enter when complete.
8.
9. Select a base point and stretch the building 8 to the east. Use polar tracking to keep the building
straight.
10.
11. Select the center tree.
12.
13. Start the scale command.
14.
15. Click the center of the tree for the base point. Specify a scale of 0.5. Press enter.
16.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 43 of 390
15. When prompted for a reference length, click the two points representing the current width of the block.
16. For the new length, click the opposite side of the pipe.
The result should be that the block fits perfectly at the end of the pipe.
17. Save the drawing. End of exercise.
12:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-060-004.mp4
030.060.004
Trim.dwg
Trim and Extend
Trim and Extend are frequently discussed together because they are two sides of the same proverbial coin. The
two commands behave in a very similar manner.
When working with the trim command, you can switch to extend mode by pressing the shift key on your keyboard.
These commands are both found on the Modify panel of the home tab. When you first start the command you are
asked to select objects for a cutting edge (boundary edge for extend). However, I recommend pressing enter on
your keyboard to take the option to Select All.
By using the <Select All> option you simplify the trim/extend process.
Break
Break and Break at Point are the same command. In the case of Break at Point, the icon chooses the command
line options for you.
You will probably find that the break at point version of the command is more useful and easier to control.
When working with the Break version of the command (the default version) the first click specifies the object and
the location of the gap that will be formed in the object.
The problem with this, however, is that object snaps do not engage and therefore, the exact location of the gap is
difficult to control.
To overcome this, you could use the First Point option.
The break at point version of the command automatically picks the first point for you and forces the first point to
be the same as the second point. The result is a single break in the line. No gap is formed.
Exercise: Trim/Extend/Break
First you will experiment with some junk lines to get the feel for the options in the Trim/Extend and Break
commands.
When you feel confident with the new tools, use them to Trim both intersections in the drawing.
1. Open the drawing Trim.dwg
To get a feel for the Trim command (and to review the offset command) zoom to the two lines in the SE
corner of the drawing. These dont represent any physical objects, they are just here for practice.
2. Start the Offset command. Specify an offset distance of 40 feet. Press Enter.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 44 of 390
7/3/2015
Page 45 of 390
Fillet/Chamfer
Fillet and chamfer have many similarities. In both commands, if you start with a polyline, the result will remain a
polyline. If you start with line segments, the result will be separate segments. Both need information before they
will appear to work.
Fillet
Pronounced fill it not fill eh, the fillet command is the most common method for creating arcs between lines.
The first thing you do is set the radius value. If you forget this step, the default radius is 0 and nothing will happen.
The command line will tell you what the current fillet radius value is. AutoCAD will remember the last used value.
Key-in R and Enter OR pick radius from the dynamic input menu.
Chamfer
Like fillet, chamfer needs information given to it before it will proceed as expected. You need to specify two
distances or a distance and an angle to complete the command.
1. Keep working in the drawing form the previous exercise or open up Fillet-chamfer.dwg
2. Start the Fillet command. Type in R for Radius. Press enter.
3. Specify a radius of 30 feet. Press enter.
4. Fillet all the orange curb lines to 30 feet at the Dickason intersection.
5. Use a fillet radius of 35 at the STH 73 intersection.
6. Use the Chamfer command to create sight lines.
7. For the intersection with Dickason, use a chamfer distance of 15 feet . (Note: the foot symbol is not
needed. )
8. For the Intersection with STH 73, use a chamfer distance of 20 feet.
9. At the end of the process ,both intersections will be filleted and chamfered with the radii and distances
specified.
10. Save the drawing. End of Exercise.
030.070 Layers
Section updated:
10/1/2012
18:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-070-001.mp4
030.070.001
Layers.dwg
Introduction
Creating different types of objects on their own layer is the best way to keep your drawings organized and
manageable. In the exercises you have worked with up to this point, the layers have been created for you. In this
chapter you will start to work with layers.
In this chapter:
Current layer vs Object Layer
Creating New Layers
Working with Layer States (Freeze/Thaw, On/Off, Lock/Unlock)
Working With Layers
Everything you draw should go on a layer. No exceptions! The good news is that once you get Civil 3D involved, it
will push things to the correct layer.
Layers are key to AutoCAD in keeping your drawing well organized.
They are especially valuable when it comes to printing because you can freeze items you dont wish to display on a
plot.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 46 of 390
When you start a drawing tool and start drawing, that line is being created on the current layer. You can tell what
layer is current by looking at the layer dropdown on the Home tab...Layers panel.
To switch which layer is current, make sure nothing is selected in the drawing and click on the dropdown arrow and
select the layer you want.
Important Layer Notes
When an object is selected, its layer is displayed in the layer dropdown.
To change and objects layer:
Select the object whose layer you wish to change
Go to the layer dropdown on the Home tab > layers panel
Pick the new layer.
A great command to know is the Layer Previous command. If you want to get back to the layer state you were in
last, hit this and it will take you back. For example, say you accidentally hit thaw all layers in a viewport. Layer
previous will restore the layers.
Finished projects should have nothing on layer zero.
Do not use the Defpoints layer. It doesnt plot, and is used by AutoCAD as a placeholder for dimensions.
Creating a New Layer
To create a new layer:
1. Click the Layer Properties Manager Button.
2.
3. Inside layer properties manager, click the new layer button .
4.
5. Type in the layers name and hit enter to continue.
6.
7. You may wish to make the new layer current by double clicking on it in the layer manager.
Layer Properties manager can be closed or kept open like any other Tool Palette. (See Working with Tool Palettes
for more information)
Layer Properties
Note: Modelspace and viewport concepts are discussed in depth in a later section.
Layer Tools
There are quite a few tools in the layer panel. The following list is a rundown of the most frequently used tools on
this panel.
7/3/2015
Page 47 of 390
6. From the layer properties manager, click the new layer icon.
A new layer is created. If you had P_PATH_SIDEWALK highlighted at the time you clicked the New icon,
the layers properties will be identical.
7. Name the new layer P_NOTES.
8. Press enter to complete the naming process before proceeding.
9. Click the square in the Color Column.
You are prompted to select color using the Select color dialog.
10. Click the RED square, then click OK.
11. Repeat steps 5-7 to create a second new layer called P_CRDR.
12. Press enter and set the color of the new layer to Green.
13. Close the layer property manager by clicking the X in top of the dialog.
The side of the layer manager that has the X may vary depending on where the dialog box is sitting on
your screen.
14. From the layers panel fly-out, click Thaw All layers.
All of the Frozen layers are now visible.
15. Press Escape to ensure no objects are selected.
16. Click the Make Object Layer current button.
17. Click the red loop at the pedestrian bridge in the SE portion of the site.
18. P_STRUCT is now the current layer.
19. In the layers flyout, turn OFF the option for Locked and Faded layers When you have successfully turned
this off the slider bar will not be selectable and the icon is no longer blue.
20. Click Layer isolate
You are prompted to select objects.
21. Click on one of the pavement marking lines at the park & ride in the NE portion of the site. Then press
enter.
Only the pavement markings are visible in the drawing. Also note that the layer 0 is current. This is telling
us that the pavement markings are actually on layer 0. We will fix this in a later step!
22. Open the layer properties manager and make note of what is going on with the layers.
23. Close the layer properties manager when complete.
What you should observe is that the layer isolate command utilizes the Off command rather than the
freeze option for hiding layers.
24. Double-click your middle mouse wheel to Zoom extents.
Notice that even though layers are off (such as RAB_SB_TURN_Left, and P_WAL) zoom is treating them
like they are still there.
25. Click Layer unisolate.
The drawing goes back to how it was prior to using the layer isolate command.
26. Turn on the layer RAB_SB_TURN_Left
27. Use the layer pull-down to make the current layer 0.
28. Click on the Layer Freeze command from the Layer Panel.
You are prompted to select objects on layers to be frozen.
Click several objects to freeze as many layers as you can.
Make sure to select the green circle in the far right side of the drawing.
29. Just for fun click on the one of the pavement marking lines.
What happens? The only items visible should be the pavement markings
You will not be able to freeze this layer because you should have made it current in a previous step.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 48 of 390
30. Again, double-click your middle mouse wheel to zoom extents. This time the interchange fills the drawing
area with little room to spare.
31. Click Layer Previous until all of the layers are visible again.
32. What happens if you click Layer previous twice?
The first click should take you the layer state before you used the freeze command. Clicking it twice will
take you back to the isolated layer state.
33. Again, use Layer Isolate to isolate the pavement markings layer, as you did preiously.
34. Use a large selection window to select all of the visible objects. All of the pavement markings should be
selected.
35. Use the layer pulldown to change the layer of the spokes to P_PM
36. Press Escape when complete. Because the layer you are moving the items to is off, you will receive a
message that the items are on a layer that is off.
37. Click Close.
38. Click Layer Un-isolate again.
39. Verify that all the layers are on and thawed.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.
8:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-070-002.mp4
030.070.002
Layers2.dwg
Layer Walk
Several commands that will help you manage the often numerous layers I the layer walk command and creating
layer states. These commands go hand-in-hand because layer states can be made from the Layer Walk
command.
The layer walk command is located in the Layers panel flyout.
When you first enter the layer walk command, the layers that are visible in the drawing will be highlighted in blue. If
the layer is Off or Frozen it will not be highlighted.
Use the Control + click and Shift click commands to select various combinations of visible layers. The graphic will
update instantly to reveal what is on the layers you have chosen.
Keep Restore on exit checked. Instead of changing the layers directly from this dialog box, we will save a layer
state.
When a combination of layers is active that might be useful to you repeatedly in the process of design, you can
save the layer combination as a Layer State.
Layer States
When you get into Civil 3D, youll see that every element goes to its own layer. This means that a Civil 3D project
can easily have several hundred layers. For example, the WisDOT base template contains over 700 layers - thats
before you draw your first line!
To help manage the layers (and your sanity) use Layer States. Lets say youve been working in modelspace
freezing things, thawing things, maybe locking things and you think to yourself, Gee this is a good point I might
want to get back to quickly. Create a new layer state!
Give the new state a name and click OK.
Now you can easily get back to that layer situation by hitting the dropdown again and setting your desired state
current.
This also works inside viewports. So if youve got a pretty state youd like to plot, double click inside the viewport
and set the layer state you want current.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 49 of 390
Back in the Layer panel, you will see the layer states listed in the pull-down. To restore a layer state, simply select
the saved state and the drawing will switch.
At any time you can create a layer state using the New Layer State button found in this pull down.
7/3/2015
Page 50 of 390
11:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-070-003.mp4
030.070.003
Layers3.dwg
Layer Filters
Layer filters help you narrow down what layers are shown in the layer properties listing.
The layer filters do not actually change what layers are visible. However, you can use Shfit + click, Ctrl + click or
Ctrl+A to select layers from the listing and perform action on them.
Find a Layer
To quickly locate a layer without using a layer filter, use the search field in the upper right corner of the layer
properties manager.
The asterisk acts as a wildcard to make your search more general. For example, here you see the search for all
layers containing the word text in the name.
This search is not case-sensitive.
7/3/2015
Page 51 of 390
Layer Settings
The wrench icon in the layer properties manager will take you to layer settings.
In the exercise for this section, you will examine the results of changing the Layer Isolate settings.
You will also see the pros and cons of having the Dialog Settings Apply layer filter to toolbar selected.
7/3/2015
Page 52 of 390
030.080 Properties
Section updated:
10/1/2012
9:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-080-001.mp4
030.080.001
Properties2.dwg
Properties
The properties tool palette is a great tool to know. The properties palette allows you to see information about a
selected object and make modifications.
From the previous section, you know that selecting an object, and then right-clicking it is a way to view commands
associated with an object. Properties is one of the items you can access this way.
You can also access the properties palette by clicking the Properties icon from the Home tab > Palettes panel from
the ribbon.
At the top of the properties palette, you will see the type of object you have selected. You can change many things
about an object right from here, such as the layer and elevation.
If you have multiple objects selected, you will see the number of items in parenthesis at the top of the properties
panel. Click on the dropdown to see the breakdown of the types of objects.
If you wish to make changes using the properties palette-, you will need to click into the area you want to change to
wake up the cell. Any properties that cannot be changed here will appear slightly grayed out.
Exercise: Working with the Properties Palette
This drawing has several things wrong with it which you will correct using Properties.
1. Open the file Properties2.dwg
2. Open the Properties Pallet by Going to the Home tab > Properties.
An empty properties pallet shows with No Selection at the top.
3. Select one of the grid lines ,right-click and pick Select Similar.
All grid lines become selected. In the Properties dialog, notice that the color of the lines is not ByLayer as
it should be. Also, the Layer is 0.
4. Set the Color to ByLayer.
5. Change the Layer to E_MAP_Gridlines
6. Select one of the Tree blocks, then right-click and pick Select Similar.
7. Use the Properties to change
Color to ByLayer.
Layer to E_LAND_Vegetation
X and Y Scales to 1
8. Press Escape when complete.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 53 of 390
6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-080-002.mp4
030.080.002
Properties2.dwg
Quick Select
Quick select is a selection tool that goes above and beyond the capabilities of the Select Similar command.
You can access the Quick Select tool at any time by right-clicking. It does not matter if you have items selected
ahead of time.
Select similar looks at object type and layer only. In the case of blocks, select similar uses the block name and
layer to locate similar items. Using Quick select can filter your drawing for specific information, based on any
property of the object.
Using quick select requires you to specify where you are searching, what you are searching for, what properties to
look at and how to identify the items you want.
It helps to say the search out loud to check if you have the correct criteria set.
You can also look for all items of a particular type. In the Operator field, you will always have the option to Select
All. This will pick all items of the object type you choose, regardless of layer or any other parameters.
If you have items selected ahead of time, the Apply to: option will read Current Selection. You can use the dropdown to switch to entire drawing or remain on Current selection to narrow down your previous search results.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
20:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-001.mp4
Page 54 of 390
The best method for creating text in AutoCAD is to use the MTEXT command. This is found under
Annotate...Text...Multiline Text
Starting Text
Click an imaginary rectangle object to approximate the location of the text box. Once the text is placed you will see
the CAD interface change.
The Text Editor is a contextual tab that you will only see when creating or editing MTEXT. It behaves much like
Microsoft word in terms of formatting and typing in text. Any font and font size can be used in this editor.
The text in the graphic also has similarities to word processing. You can change the width of the page by using
the diamond shape on the right end of the toolbar.
Additionally, misspelled words will appear with a red underline - but only while the text is actively being edited.
Once the text editor is closed, this line will not appear.
Once you have completed working with text, click the Close Text editor button.
Importing Text
You can import two main types of files directly into AutoCAD:
RTF (rich text format)
TXT (plain text)
When it comes to working with existing Microsoft word documents, the easiest thing to do is use Copy and Paste.
Most formatting from Word, such s bold, underline and italic, will translate to AutoCAD. The only formatting that
will not translate to AutoCAD is strikethrough text.
Converting TEXT to MTEXT
When a CAD file is translated from Microstation to AutoCAD, the text does not translate as multiline text. The text
comes over as single-line text (or what some older AutoCAD people might call DTEXT). This type of text is more
difficult to format, as it does not use the contextual tab to control it.
You will want to convert plain text to mtext, using a tool found on the express tools tab.
This file should open in paperspace on a layout called 11x17. Verify that the
current layer is P_RW_TEXT.
2. From the Annotate tab, Text panel, set the current text style to 100.
3. Click Multiline Text button.
4. Use the rectangle on the left side of the drawing to guide you as you create the two corners of the text box.
5. Type in the text, NOTES: and press enter. Notice that enter in this case does not exit the text editor.
6 From the Text Editor contextual tab, click the Tools flyout and click Import Text.
7. Browse to the location of your training files and locate EASEMENT TEXT.TXT. Double click this file to
import it into AutoCAD.
8. Still in the text editor, highlight the text TEMPORARY LIMITED EASEMENT (TLE) and click the B for bold in
the Text Editor.
9. Repeat this step to make the text PERMANENT LIMITED EASEMENT (PLE) bold.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 55 of 390
030.090.002
Annotation Scale
An annotative object automatically resizes based on the intended plot scale. The annotation scale only affects
objects that have the annotative attribute turned on.
The following base AutoCAD object types can be annotative:
Text
Dimensions
Multileaders
Hatch patterns
Blocks
Linetypes
In the case of text, dimensions and multileaders, the annotative behavior is determined as part of the objects style.
In the case of a hatch pattern, the annotative behavior can be turned on as you place the hatch. For blocks
annotative behavior is turned on in the block definition. For all of the above object types, you can also set the
behavior after the fact in the Properties palette.
Linetypes are a little different. Whether or not a line changes with annotation scale depends on an overall drawing
setting called MSLTSCALE. This drawing variable will affect all lines/polylines/circles etc. in the drawing. Key-in
MSLTSCALE at the command line. The default of 0 means that lines will not change per annotation scale. Setting
this to 1 will force lines to update with annotation scale.
You can tell an object has annotative behavior tied to it if you move your cursor over it and see the annotative
object symbol pop up next to your cursor.
Annotative Text
In this module, we will focus on annotative text. Whenever annotative text displays a height, you will see two
values. The Paper text height is the plotted size. The Model text height is the paper text height multiplied by the
annotative scale.
Each object will have a list of scales associated with it. For instance, select a piece of annotative text and rightclick. You will see Annotative Object Scale...Add Delete Scales.
You will then see a listing of the scales at which the object is intended to plot. For scales in the list, the text will
resize accordingly. For all other scales, the text can be hidden.
7/3/2015
Page 56 of 390
7/3/2015
Page 57 of 390
Note that the text in each viewport is the same height. Whenever you see text height for an annotative
object, it is always referring to the height plotted.
Save and close the drawing. End of Exercise.
16:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-090-003.mp4
030.090.003
Text3.dwg
Text Styles
You have already been using text styles in this class, but you will go more in depth.
When making a new text style, making it annotative is very easy.
Just turn on the Annotative check box under size.
Leave the paper text height zero if you wish to use this style in a dimension. By default, the text height is
0.2 plotted.
You can change this default using the TEXTSIZE system variable.
If you do set a height in the style, the TEXTSIZE variable is ignored.
7/3/2015
Page 58 of 390
030.090.004
Multileaders1.dwg
Multileaders
Multileaders are a leader with either text or a block as its end. You can choose any type of arrowhead for a leader.
You will find this command on the annotate tab.
Here you see multiple types of leaders including ones with multiple leader lines.
Multileaders can be comprised of straight lines or splines.
The text component can be text on its own or a block.
Leaders are intelligent and will prevent the leaders from crossing attached text.
Exercise: Placing Multileaders
1. In this exercise you will work in modelspace from the layout tab to place multileaders.
2.
3. Open the drawing MULTILEADERS1.dwg
4.
5. On the Annotate tab > Leaders Panel, set the current style to HEX.
4. Change the current layer to P_MISC_TXT.
5. Start the leader tool by clicking Multileader.
6. Use the node object snap to place the arrowhead on the sign to the right of the Dickason intersection. The
blue marker is there as a guide. The first click sets the arrowhead location.
7. Click a second time to place the landing location.
8. You are prompted to Enter a Tag Number.
9. Type in 1 and press enter. The multi leader will now be complete.
10. Repeat the previous steps to add a multileader at the sign just north of the intersection.
Use the HEX multileader style
Number the sign 2.
11. Change the active multileader style to TEXT ONLY.
12. Click to place the arrowhead at one of the nodes on the end of the magenta line as shown below.
13. Click to place the landing to the upper right.
14. Type in SAWCUT in the text box.
15. Click Close Text Editor to complete the leader.
16. Click the Add Leader button from the Leaders Panel.
17. Click the newly created SAWCUT multileader to indicate which multileader you are adding on to.
18. Click the opposite side of the street to place the arrowhead of the second leader.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 59 of 390
030.090.005
Dimension1.dwg, Dimension2.dwg
Dimensions
In this chapter you will be learning how to modify the new object you create.
Dimensioning is the process of adding measurement annotation to a drawing.
You can create dimensions for a variety of object types in many orientations. The basic types of dimensioning are
Linear
Radial (radius, diameter and jogged)
Angular
Ordinate
Arc Length
Linear dimensions can be horizontal, vertical, aligned, rotated, baseline, or continued (chained). Dimensions have
several distinct elements: dimension text, dimension lines, arrowheads, and extension lines.
Dimension text is a text string that usually indicates the measurement value. The text can also include
prefixes, suffixes, and tolerances.
A dimension line indicates the direction and extent of a dimension. For angular dimensions, the dimension
line is an arc.
Arrowheads, also called symbols of termination, are displayed at each end of the dimension line. You can
specify different sizes and shapes for arrowheads or tick marks.
Extension lines, also called projection lines or witness lines, extend from the feature to the dimension line.
A center mark is a small cross that marks the center of a circle or arc.
Centerlines are broken lines that mark the center of a circle or arc.
Open DIMENSIONS1.dwg
Set the current layer to P_DRN_TEXT
Set the current dimension style to Plan_Bearing
Set the annotation scale to 1IN:10FT
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 60 of 390
Dimension Styles
A dimension style is a named collection of dimension settings that controls the appearance of dimensions, such as
arrowhead style, text location, and lateral tolerances.
You create dimension styles to specify the format of dimensions quickly, and to ensure that dimensions conform to
industry or project standards.
When you create a dimension, it uses the settings of the current dimension style
If you change a setting in a dimension style, all dimensions in a drawing that use the style update
automatically
You can create dimension substyles that, for specified types of dimensions, deviate from the current
dimension style
If necessary, you can override a dimension style temporarily
7/3/2015
Page 61 of 390
030.100 Blocks
Section updated:
10/1/2012
15:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-100-001.mp4
030.100.001
Block Basics
A block is a group of AutoCAD objects that have been tied together. A block can be used like a rubber stamp
you can have the same items over and over in the same drawing without having to recreate them.
Every block has a main base point. The base point appears as a grip when you select the block.
First you will learn to utilize existing blocks.
7/3/2015
Page 62 of 390
The tabs represent different groupings of tools. This tool palette contains blocks that are useful to Civil 3D users.
Click on the Landscape tab.
Click the Detail tree 01.
To place a block in the drawing, click it from the palette and then place it in the drawing. The base point of the
block will automatically attach to your cursor. The first click places the base point of the block wherever you click
in the graphic. The second click establishes the rotation of the block. After you are done setting the rotation, you
are back at a Command prompt.
You may encounter blocks with the lightning bolt symbol shown in the tool palette. These are a special type of
block called dynamic blocks.
Insert Command
Inserting a Block Using the Insert Command
If you dont have blocks set up on a tool palette, you can use the more traditional Insert Block command.
Existing Block
If a block has already been inserted into the drawing or is defined in the template, you can easily insert it using the
insert block command.
From the Insert tab, go to the block panel and select Insert.
Click the dropdown to see the blocks available to you.
Select the block you wish to work with.
Set your Insertion point, scale and rotation options.
Click OK.
Browsing for Blocks
A block is just a special case of a DWG file. In fact, any DWG file can be used as a block.
When you get to the insert dialog box, click the Browse button and navigate to the folder where the DWG is saved.
Set the insertion, scale and rotation options.
Click OK.
Once the block has been pulled in from an outside file, it is no longer necessary to browse out for it again. It will
now show up in the list of blocks available in the drawing.
7/3/2015
Page 63 of 390
030.100.002
Blocks2.dwg
Creating Blocks
You learned in the chapter on layers, that 0 is not used for general drafting. The 0 layer acts as a placeholder for
the inner geometry of blocks. In other words, blocks should be created on layer 0.
When the completed blocks are ready to use, they will be inserted with the correct layer current.
When you draw objects you wish to convert to a block, you will find the Create block icon on the Insert tab of the
ribbon, on the Block panel. When you create a block in this manner you are creating a local block.
Give your block a name and select the base point using the pick point icon.
Use Select objects to make sure you have the correct items selected. Generally people want to use the
Convert to Block option.
Verify the units, whether or not the item is to be annotative and click OK.
If you wish to export your block to an external drawing (i.e. turn it into a global block) you can do so by typing W at
the command line. The write block command will allow you to pick an existing block from the drawing (as shown
here) or you can export items from your drawing as a block while maintaining them as non-blocks locally. In many
cases, you will be using this command to push an existing block to its own DWG file as shown here.
The most common mistake when writing blocks is forgetting to set the destination path. The default path is the My
Documents folder. Dont lose your blocks!
Editing Blocks
For many blocks, simply double-clicking on the block you wish to edit is the most efficient way to get into the Block
Editor. After you double-click on a block, the Edit Block Definition appears and you can verify which block you want
to edit.
However, in some cases you will encounter blocks that contain attributes, such as the WisDOT titleblocks. When
you double click a block that contains attributes, the block editor does not appear. Instead you are taken to a spot
where you can edit attributes. In cases where double-clicking does not take you to the block editor, you can use
the block editor button from the ribbon.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 64 of 390
Once inside the block editor, you will notice that your workspace has automatically changed. The background will
be a gray color, helping you to visually identify that you are no longer in a regular drawing area. You will also see a
green context tab with block-specific tools in it. Dont worry, you can still change tabs and use more familiar draw
and modify commands from the home tab.
When you are done working in the block editor, you will want to save the block.
Notice that you can also save the block with a different name if you wish. Using save as will not change the original
block, but it will create an additional block that contains the changes you made.
7/3/2015
Page 65 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
9:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-001.mp4
030.110.001
Plotting1.dwg
Printing Basics
At the bottom-left of your screen you should see several tabs. The Model tab is where all of your drafting and the
majority of your labeling should go. The layout tabs represent pieces of paper and act as a dynamic print preview.
If you do not see your layout tabs:
It is recommended that you have your layout and model tabs displayed. If you dont see them, do the following:
Right-click the Model button and select Display Layout and Model Tabs
All formal printing will happen from the layout tabs. The only time you would print from the Model tab is if you are
just creating a check and are not concerned about scale or a titleblock.
7/3/2015
Page 66 of 390
Printing Terminology
Annotation scale - the scale that drives the size of annotative text/blocks/etc on the model tab. This does not
affect the size of the final plot, nor does it carry over to the viewports.
Layout - acts as a working print preview-like view. This shows how your design, title block and the paper relate
to each other. In some cases you will see this referred to as a sheet.
Modelspace - the location where your main design is drafted. When you are on the main model tab, you are
always in modelspace. You can be in modelspace from a layout tab if you have a viewport active. Modelspace
measurements will always be in feet.
Paperspace - the drafting mode when you are directly working on the paper. You can tell you are in
paperspace when you see triangular USC icon. Paperspace always shows units in inches (not feet).
Printing - sending a single layout to a printer or to a file such as PDF.
Plotting - same as printing. These terms are used interchangeably throughout the software and this document.
Publishing - sending multiple layouts to a printer (or PDF file) at once. Publishing can be done through the
Sheetset Manager or through the publish command.
Sheetset manager - a saved list of layouts that go together. Primarily this is for printing purposes, but it is also
used to fill out pre-defined fields in the titleblock.
Viewport - a window into your design as seen from one of the layout tabs. Viewports are used to set the
desired plot scale of the project.
Viewport scale - the plotted scale assigned to the viewport.
7/3/2015
Page 67 of 390
Layout Paperspace
The layout tabs are there for you as you get ready to print your project. Switch to the layout tab you wish to work
with by clicking on the name of the tab at the bottom of your drawing screen. Once you have switched to the
layout, you will see the following: The big white square represents the size and orientation of the piece of paper
you would like to print. We will discuss setting the paper size in the next unit.
The dashed line represents the printable bounds, or the limit as far as how close to the edge of the paper you
printer can print. The distance between this dashed line and the edge of paper is usually determined by the printer
you are sending your design to. The viewport is a window into your design.
The triangular Paperspace UCS icon is a sign to us that we are in paperspace. Any drawing we do when the
triangular icon is showing will only be on our current layout. We are not affecting Modelspace as long as you see
this symbol or the MODEL button at the bottom on the screen. Any zooming in and out just zooms the paper itself,
and does not affect the final print of the drawing. Paperspace is where you will draw your title block, add north
arrows and add text related to the date, project location etc.
Layout- Modelspace
If you double-click inside the viewport you are activating a viewport.
Youll notice that the UCS icon changes and the viewport outline gets heavier. You are now in Modelspace. We
can now work inside the viewport. Any drawing we do at this point affects the main model. If we zoom and pan in
this state, you are changing the scale and location of the Modelspace view. It is a GREAT idea to lock the viewport
once you have gotten your view in the right place and at the desired scale. With the viewport active, set the scale
by using the scale list in the status bar.
When the viewport is locked, you can still draw in Modelspace and manipulate layers, you just cant pan or
zoom.To get back to paperspace, double-click outside the viewport or click the button in your status bar.
11:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-002.mp4
030.110.002
Plotting1.dwg
Exercise: Getting the Feel for Paperspace & Modelspace
In this exercise, you will get comfortable working with layout tabs, paperspace and modelspace.
1. Open the drawing Plotting1.dwg.
2.
3. Switch to layout view Layout 1 34x22.
4.
5. Right-click on Layout 1 Layout 1 34x22 and select New Layout.
4. Switch to the new layout.
Double click the tab for the layout and rename it to My New Layout. The text will not be bold when you
have completed the rename.
Select the edge of the viewport in the center of the page and Delete it. (You will learn about setting the
Paper size in an upcoming exercise.)
5. Switch back to Layout 1 34x22.
Click the gray rectangle on its edge. This is the viewport
Click the lock icon in the lower right corner of the screen so that it turns yellow. The viewport is now
unlocked.
Change the viewport scale to 1IN:100FT.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 68 of 390
Click the lock icon again. You have just changed the viewport scale.
At the command line, type in REA to regenerate the view and update the special text that labels the
viewport scale.
6. Hold down the control key on your keyboard and drag the Layout 1 34x22 tab to the right. You will see a
layout symbol with a plus sign appear.
7. Release the cursor and the control key to form the copy.
8. Make the new layout current by clicking the tab.
Double click it to edit the name.
Rename the tab to Broadhead Intersection.
9. Drag the tab so that it is to the right of My New Layout.
Keep an eye on the black arrow to help you find the location of the tab.
10. Right-click and Delete the Layout2 34x22 tab. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
11. Switch to the Example tab.
12. Verify that the current layer is PLT_Sheet_Border
13. On the Insert tab...Block panel of the ribbon, click Insert. The block SHT42-C3D12 is already defined in the
listing of available blocks.
Hint: Start typing the name of the block to jump in the listing.
Uncheck all options for Specify on screen
Click OK.
The block should drop in but is too small.
14. Start the Scale command that you used in the Modify chapter.
Use the lower-left most corner of the titleblock as the basepoint.
Use a scale factor of 2.
The block should now line up perfectly with the sheet.
15. Click Insert again. This time select the Graphic Scale that is in the listing.
Place a checkmark next to Specify on screen for the insertion point.
Set all other options as shown below.
16. Repeat the block insertion one last time and insert the block called North3.
Save the Drawing, End of exercise.
13:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-110-003.mp4
030.110.003
Plotting1.dwg
Exercise: Creating and Scaling Viewports
In this exercise, you will create viewports and set them to the desired plot scale.
You will use the dynamic block that was placed in the previous exercise to show the correct scale on the bar scale.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
5. Use the title block with object snaps to set the first corner of the title block. Click this first corner.
6. Click the second corner using object snaps.
7. The modelspace image will appear in the viewport.
8. Double click your cursor inside the viewport.
You have switched to modelspace through the viewport.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 69 of 390
030.110.004
Plotting3.dwg
Page Setup
You will frequently use the same size piece of paper - usually 11x17. You will also frequently need the same
settings for multiple layouts. In the next few steps, you will create a Named Page Setup and apply it to multiple
layouts.
Page Setup Manager
Right-click on the tab you are working with.
Create New Page Setup
Select Page Setup Manager
In the Page Setup Manager, click NEW
In the New Page Setup dialog box you are creating the name for your printing settings.
I recommend having the name reflect:
The name of the printer
The paper size
What type of color the print out will be
Click OK.
Setting the Printer
First, set your printer to the correct device. All printers that you are attached to will show up in this list, as well
as some options for printing to a file (such as PDF).
In most cases, you should print to PDF first. This eliminates any problems sending the output directly to the
printer.
Paper Size
Next, set your paper size. The list of sizes comes from the printer. In the case of a PDF, there is no physical
limit of roll width. Any size can be used from PDF. Whenever possible, use the WisDOT specific paper sizes.
These are set up to have the correct margin location and sizes to fit the WisDOT title blocks correctly.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 70 of 390
7/3/2015
Page 71 of 390
7/3/2015
Page 72 of 390
7/3/2015
Page 73 of 390
030.120 XREFS
Section updated:
10/1/2012
16:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-120-001.mp4
030.120.001
XREF.dwg
7/3/2015
Page 74 of 390
In other words, if X is referenced into Y as an overlay, and then Y is later referenced into Z, X does
not come along for the ride. When Im working in Z, Ill just see Y attached. Overlay is preferable
because it is less confusing and avoids the dreaded circular reference.
7/3/2015
Page 75 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
16:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/030/030-130-001.mp4
030.130.001
Workspaces
When you are working in AutoCAD the display of your tabs, ribbons and Quick access toolbar are controlled by a
named Workspace. The workspace that you are working in currently is most likely the Civil 3D default.
If you have modified the position of your tabs and/or panels you can save your workspace changes to your own
named workspace.
After changes are made, you can click Save Current As.. to create a custom named workspace.
Give your Workspace a name and click Save
7/3/2015
Page 76 of 390
Tool palette
Tile Vertically
Layer Freeze
Exercise: Quick Access Toolbar
In this exercise, you will add useful tools to the quick access toolbar. It is highly recommended that you go through
this and add the recommended tools to the QAT.
1. Open any drawing (or click QNEW). No drawing will take place in this file. It doesnt matter what drawing
you have open for this example, as long as you have a drawing active, you will have access to the dialog
boxes needed to make the changes.
2.
3. Right-click on the Workspaces pull-down in the Quick Access Toolbar and select Remove From Quick
Acces toolbar.
4.
5. On the home tab...Layers panel right-click on the layers pulldown.
4. Select Add to Quick Access Toolbar.
5. At the command line, key-in CUI
6. After a moment the CUI editor will appear.
7. In the upper-left side, locate Quick Access Toolbars > Quickaccess toolbar 1 and layer combo control.
8. Highlight Layer combo control.
9. In the right hand side, change the Maximum width to 300.
10. Change the Minumum width to 250.
11. Click OK to finish the task and close the CUI editor. After a moment the Layer pull-down in the Quick
access toolbar will become longer.
12. On the Home tab, right click on Properties and select Add to Quick Access toolbar.
13. Right-click on Toolpalettes and select Add to Quick Acces toolbar. You can add as little or as much to the
Quick Access toolbar as you wish.
14. Click on the workspace icon at the far bottom of the AutoCAD window.
15. Select Save Current As
16. You are prompted to name the workspace.
17. Name the workspace My Workspace and click Save.
18. Close AutoCAD Civil 3D. This ensures that the changes you made to the interface are truly saved.
19. Open AutoCAD Civil 3D again (it does not matter what drawing you have up). The changes you made to
the quick access toolbar will still be available.
20. End of Exercise.
Options
When you first open AutoCAD, the background is not a true black, but more of a dark chalkboard color. If you are
familiar with older versions of AutoCAD, you may also notice that object snap symbols are now green rather than
yellow. These colors are simply a matter of personal preference and can be easily modified in the Options Dialog.
You can access AutoCAD Options from many places. From the Application menu, go to Options.
Also, if you are not in an active command, right-click anywhere to access the options dialog.
On the Display tab you will see many options that are available to change. The most common option to change
from here is the color display.
Once inside the Drawing Window Colors area, you can change many things. However the default is the color of
the main background.
The Display tab is also where you can change the Cross hair size as a percentage of the screen. The default is
5%, but many people choose to increase this for better visibility.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 77 of 390
If you are primarily working in 2D, you may not need the viewcube and can remove it by unchecking it as shown.
If you would like to remove the viewport controls from your views, you can uncheck the Display the Viewport
Control checkbox.
AutoCAD saves these settings to the local users machine registry. That is, if another user logs into a computer
that has custom settings in the Options, the second user will not see the changes.
These options can be exported out to a Profile file if needed.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
040.010.001
Bridge Survey.dwg
Point basics
What is a point?
Civil 3D object that represents a location
Frequently collected from a field survey / GPS
or imported from CAiCE
or generated by hand
Has X,Y and (usually) Z coordinates
Civil 3D Points vs AutoCAD Points
Civil 3D Points
Are used frequently in Civil 3D
Are intelligent objects
Have description and number
Page 78 of 390
Definitions
Description Key Set: A listing of field codes, styles and layers. When a point is imported/created Civil 3D
checks to see if there is a code matching the point description. If so, the point will take on the properties from
the Description Key Set
Point Group: A listing of points that have something in common. For example, all Electrical Utility shots or all
shots brought in from the same point file. Point groups are used to organize points and control display
Anatomy of a Point
Marker- Blocks/Symbols representing location of said shot
Text-Point number, Elevation, Description
Editing Points
Editing Markers with grips
Multifunctional grip menu
Editing Labels with grips
Multifunctional grip menu
Section updated:
10/1/2012
11:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-020-001.mp4
040.020.001
Bridge Survey.dwg
Accessing all the Points in a file
Toolspace...Prospector tab...Points...Rt. Click...Edit Points
Edit Points Table in Panorama
Accessing specific points
Toolspace...Prospector tab...Point Groups...Specific Point Group Name...Rt. Click...Edit Points
Group Locking vs Point Locking
Lock Points will prevent you from moving or editing points graphically or through the Panorama
Lock refers to the group. If a group is locked, additional points cannot be added to the group. It also prevents
the group from being deleted
Zoom to Points
Pan to Points
Section updated:
10/1/2012
11:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-030-001.mp4
040.030.001
Point_Groups.dwg
Point Group: A listing of points that have something in common. For example, all Electrical Utility shots or all shots
brought in from the same point file
Another way to think of it: Point Groups act as a Filter. Filter points in and/or out to specify which points will be
part of the group.
Point groups are helpful when
Building a surface, but want to EXCLUDE certain shots
(inverts, top of hydrant, tree stumps)
Changing the elevation of a specific range of points.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 79 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
10/1/2012
12:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-040-001.mp4
040.040.001
Point_Groups2.dwg
Point Group Listing
Toolspace...Point Groups...Rt. Click Properties
Point Styles
Marker Styles
Label Styles
Description Keys
040.050.001
Section updated:
10/1/2012
6:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-060-001.mp4
040.060.001
Existing_TOPO.dwg
Creating Points
Home Tab...Create Ground Data panel...Points pull down...Point Creation Tools...Create Points Toolbar opens
Expand Points Creation
Prompt For Descriptions = None
Prompt For Elevations = Automatic
7/3/2015
Page 80 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
14:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-080-001.mp4
040.080.001
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
6:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-090-001.mp4
040.090.001
Bridge Survey2.dwg
Locked Points will not allow editing
Grip Editing
Hot Grips
Grip Menu
Edit Elevations
Prospector...Point Group...Rt. Click Edit Points
Select All...Rt click Datum
Raise or lower all points
Renumber points
Page 81 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
12:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-110-001.mp4
040.110.001
6. From the Alignment menu on the points toolbar, choose At Geometry Points.
7. Select the alignment.
8. When prompted to pick a profile, keep te default of None and click OK. (Choosing a profile would add
elevation to the points).
9. Click enter to confirm the start station of 0+00.
10. Click enter again to confirm the end station of 9+73.95.
11. Press ESC to complete the command,
You now have points, but they are not displayed with descriptions.
12. In Prospector, right-click point groups and select New.
13. On the information tab, name the new point group Alignment Points.
1. Set the Point Style to P Ali Proposed Reference Line
2. Set the Label style to Point Name Full Desc 45
14. On the Include Tab, place a checkmark next to With raw descriptions matching.
15. Type EXAMPLE* in the field as shown.
16. On the Overrides tab, place a checkmark next to Style and Point Label Style.
17. Click OK.
18. Right-click the new point group and select Edit points. Verify that all of the intended points re part of the
group.
19. Save the drawing
20. Right-click the point group and select Export points.
1. Use the format PNEZD (Comma Delimited).
2. Browse to a location on your computer (such as the project folder) to save the resulting file.
3. Click OK.
End of Exercise.
Section updated:
7/1/2010
6:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-001.mp4
040.120.001
Civil 3D Points
The points created by AutoCAD Civil 3D are called Coordinate Geometry (COGO) points, which are very different
from AutoCAD point nodes. AutoCAD point nodes have only coordinate data (XYZ values) associated with them.
However, COGO points, in addition to coordinate data, have a variety of properties associated with them, including
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 82 of 390
point number, point name, raw (field) description, and full (expanded) description. Unlike AutoCAD point nodes,
which exist in a single drawing, COGO points can be stored in a project outside a drawing and referenced by
multiple users. In AutoCAD Civil 3D, the term point refers to a COGO point, not to an AutoCAD point node (from
Civil 3D 2010 Help)
Civil 3D Point properties
Number integer, required, unique
Name anything, not required, unique
Northing, Easting, Elevation
Raw Description
Full Description
Civil 3D Points are displayed in the Points Collection from the Prospector Tab of the Toolspace
7/3/2015
Page 83 of 390
2:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-002.mp4
040.120.002
6:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-003.mp4
040.120.003
9:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/040/040-120-004.mp4
040.120.004
7/3/2015
Page 84 of 390
Section updated:
4/13/2015
2:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-005-001.mp4
045.005.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-005-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the topo file from mapping data
In the Menu Browser select the New command.
From the new file dialog select the wisdot14-etopog.dwt template file.
In the Menu Browser select the Save As command.
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData folder and name the file Topo-Ex.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
In the Quick Access Toolbar click the Save button.
0:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-005-002.mp4
045.005.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-005-002-proj-dataset.zip
Insert the mapping data into the topo file
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Block panel, select the Insert command icon.
In the Insert dialog click the Browse button.
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData/Mapping folder and choose M12345678.dwg.
Click Open.
Make sure the Insert Point is set to 0,0,0 (NOT Specify On-screen).
Make sure the Scale is set to 1 (NOT Specify On-screen).
Make sure the Rotation is set to Angle 0 (NOT Specify On-screen).
Select/checkmark the Explode option.
Click OK.
Section updated:
3/1/2013
045.010.001
7/3/2015
Page 85 of 390
By default data inserted into a DWG is locked and can only be edited if the source survey database is
open for editing.
Survey databases must be created in Civil 3D, but can only be deleted in Windows.
3:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-010-002.mp4
045.010.002
4:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-010-003.mp4
045.010.003
Section updated:
4/13/2015
3:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-015-001.mp4
045.015.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-015-001-proj-dataset.zip
Copy the master survey database and rename it
Using Windows Explore, browse to C:\wisdot\stnd folder and find the SD-WisDOT-Template folder (master
database).
In the left side of that Windows Explore window, browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder.
Right-click on the SD-WisDOT-Template folder from the right side and choose Copy.
In the left side of the window right-click on the 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and choose Paste.
On the left side left click on the 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder which now holds the SD-WisDOT-Template
database folder.
Left click on the name on the folder (currently SD-WisDOT-Template) and rename it to be SD-12345678.
Assign settings to the survey database
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click the Survey Databases area and choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder.
Click OK.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, under the Survey Databases area, right-click on the SD-12345678.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 86 of 390
045.015.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-015-002-proj-dataset.zip
Create the survey database directly in Civil 3D
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the Survey Databases area.
Choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to the 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder. Click OK.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the Survey Databases area.
Choose New Local Survey Database.
In the New Local Survey Database dialog type the name SD-12345678 and click OK.
045.015.003
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-015-003-proj-dataset.zip
Import the survey query QML files
This process is for if you built the survey database from scratch, or if you discover that one or more of the standard
survey queries are not in your survey database.
Import the survey queries
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the survey database name SD-12345678 and choose Open for Edit.
Expand the SD-12345678 database.
Right-click on the Survey Queries area.
Choose Import
Browse to C:\wisdot\stnd\SD-WisDOT-Templatecool.
Select the first query you need, then, <CTRL> select the survey queries that you need to add.
Section updated:
4/13/2015
Translating the PAC file is only necessary if you have not received the LandXML file. If you have received the
LandXML file proceed to the next section Import the LandXML File Into the Survey Database.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
2:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-020-001.mp4
045.020.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-020-001-proj-dataset.zip
Translate a PAC file to a LandXML file
Page 87 of 390
3:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-020-002.mp4
045.020.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-020-002-proj-dataset.zip
Import the LandXML file into the survey database
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click the Survey Databases area and choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder.
Click OK.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, under the Survey Databases area, right-click on the SD-12345678.
Choose Open for Edit. In the Home ribbon tab, Create Ground Data panel, Select Import Survey Data.
Select the SD-12345678 database. Click Next.
In the Specify Data Source change the Data Source Type to LandXML File.
In the Selected File click the folder icon to browse to the file.
Browse to 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and select 12345678-wo01.XML. Click Open.
In the Import Survey Data dialog select Next.
7/3/2015
Page 88 of 390
045.020.003
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-020-003-proj-dataset.zip
Import the LandXML file into the survey database
In the Home ribbon tab, Create Ground Data panel, Select Import Survey Data.
Select the SD-12345678 database. Click Next.
In the Specify Data Source change the Data Source Type to LandXML File.
In the Selected File click the folder icon to browse to the file.
Browse to 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and select 12345678-wo02.XML. Click Open.
In the Import Survey Data dialog select Next.
Section updated:
4/13/2015
7/3/2015
2:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-030-001.mp4
045.030.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-030-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create a survey editing DWG
In the Menu Browser select the New command.
From the new file dialog select the wisdot14-etopog.dwt template file.
Page 89 of 390
045.030.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-030-002-proj-dataset.zip
Import a survey query to edit survey data
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand Survey Databases.
Right-click on SD-12345678 and choose Open for Edit.
Expand Survey Queries
Drag and drop the following queries into the Survey Edits.dwg:
UtilityFigures1
UtilityFigures2
UtilityPoints1
In the Survey Queries area right-click on UtilityPoints2 and choose Insert into File.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click on Point Groups and choose Update.
In the lower right of the status bar change the drawing scale to 1 IN:40 FT.
Remove a survey query from a file
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678 database, and expand the Survey Queries area.
Drag the Centerlines query into the Survey Edits.dwg.
In the SD-12345678 database, Survey Queries, right-click on the Centerlines query and choose Remove from
Drawing.
Zoom Extents and save the drawing.
Section updated:
4/13/2015
5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-040-001.mp4
045.040.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-040-001-proj-dataset.zip
Editing survey figures by adding and deleting points
Delete points from the figure
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4240,4252 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
Left-click on the figure between those two points.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 90 of 390
3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-040-002.mp4
045.040.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-040-002-proj-dataset.zip
Editing survey figures by changing the relation to points
Changing the order of points
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4234,4251 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
Left-click on the figure between points 4240, 4251 and 4234.
In the green context ribbon select Survey Figure Properties.
Near the bottom of the Figure Properties dialog select point number 4251.
In the middle bar of the Figure Properties dialog click on the Move the Selected Item Down icon.
Click OK.
7/3/2015
Page 91 of 390
Section updated:
4/13/2015
3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-050-001.mp4
045.050.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-050-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create a survey figure point-to-point
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4254,4219 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand SD-12345678, right-click on Figures.
Choose Modify Figure Begin New Figure.
Enter the figure name of OH and click <ENTER>.
Use the Snap to Point osnap option from the osnap toolbar.
Snap to the point marker for point number 4219.
Select P for Point.
For the next point in the figure line:
Type P for the Point option.
Type the point number 4254.
Click <ENTER>.
End the figure creation method by typing DO for done.
045.050.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-050-002-proj-dataset.zip
Create a survey figure interactively
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point icon.
Type 4311,4312,4294 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures. Choose Create Figure Interactively.
Name the Figure OH. Click OK.
Select the PPOL points graphically from 4311 to 4312 to 4294 (near the south of the project).
In the Figure Properties dialog click OK.
7/3/2015
Page 92 of 390
045.050.003
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-050-003-proj-dataset.zip
Create survey figure from object
In the transparent command toolbar on the right side of the drafting area, select the Zoom to Point
icon.
Type 4295,4296 (no spaces between numbers and comma).
In the Home ribbon, Draw panel choose the Polyline tool.
In the Transparent Command toolbar on the right of the screen, choose the Point Object tool.
Select the PPOL points graphically from 4295 to 4296 (near the south of the project).
Click <ESC> twice to end the transparent command and the PLINE tool.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures and choose Create Figure from Object.
Select the polyline that you just created.
Change the name to OH.
Make sure the Current Figure Prefix Database is set to WisDOT14-Etopog.
Make sure the Associate Survey Points to Vertices option is set to YES.
Click OK.
Click the <ENTER> button on the keyboard to end the command.
Select the polyline and delete it.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Figures and choose Insert into Drawing.
Zoom to the figure you just created and left click on it to select it.
From the green context ribbon select Survey Figure Properties.
In the Figure Properties click the Convert Figure to Chain and Edit Vertices.
Click Convert the Survey Figure.
Check the elevations of the two points.
Click OK.
Section updated:
4/13/2015
7/3/2015
4:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-060-001.mp4
045.060.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-060-001-proj-dataset.zip
Verify the DWG and SDB match
To verify survey database and drawing file match reinsert SDB into file
Open the SurveyEdits.dwg file
Click Save to save your drawing file.
Page 93 of 390
Section updated:
4/13/2015
3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-070-001.mp4
045.070.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-070-001-proj-dataset.zip
Replicate the SDB to the PDS C3D project
Right-click the Windows Start button and choose Open a Windows Explorer.
In the path field at the top type in this address (you can copy it from this document and paste it into that field):
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\ApplicationPlugins\B1_WisDOTModules.bundle\Contents\Windows\2014
Double-click the ReplicateSurveyDB.exe file.
For the Source Survey Project Path, click the ellipsis button to the right.
Browse to the N:\tss\survey\c3d\SD-12345678 OR C:\wisdot\survey\c3d\SD-12345678. Click OK.
For the Destination Design Project Folder click the ellipsis button on the right.
Browse to the N:\PDS\C3D\12345678\BaseData\Survey folder.
Click the Replicate Database button.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on Survey Databases.
Choose Set Working Folder.
Browse to N:\PDS\C3D\12345678\BaseData\Survey folder
In the Replicate Survey Database dialog click Exit.
3:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-070-002.mp4
045.070.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-070-002-proj-dataset.zip
Replicate the SDB to the users local drive
Right-click the Windows Start button and choose Open a Windows Explorer.
In the path field at the top type in this address (you can copy it from this document and paste it into that field):
C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\ApplicationPlugins\B1_WisDOTModules.bundle\Contents\Windows\2014
Double-click the ReplicateSurveyDB.exe file.
7/3/2015
Page 94 of 390
Section updated:
4/13/2015
2:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-080-001.mp4
045.080.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-080-001-proj-dataset.zip
Insert the Topo queries into the topo file
In the Quick Access toolbar choose Open and browse to open the 12345678/BaseData/Topo-Ex.dwg file.
In the Survey tab, right-click the SD-12345678 database and choose Open for Edit.
In the Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678 database, expand Survey Queries.
Drag the following queries into the topo file:
TopoFigures1, TopoFigures2, TopoPoints1, TopoPoints2, and TopoPoints3.
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save icon.
3:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-080-002.mp4
045.080.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-080-002-proj-dataset.zip
Delete mapping data if needed
In the Quick Access toolbar select Open and browse to open the 12345678/BaseData/Topo-Ex.dwg
file.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand the SD-12345678, and expand the Survey Queries.
Right-click on Topo Figure 1 survey query and choose Zoom to.
Under the SD-12345678 select on the Figures area.
In the preview window of the Toolspace scroll down to the HEDG24 figure.
Click on the HEDG24 figure name to highlight the figure in the file.
Select the duplicate line in the file, make sure you have the mapping data block selected.
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Modify panel select on the Explode icon.
Select the duplicated line and notice that the green context ribbon does not indicate a survey figure and the layer
manager changes to the layer that the line to be deleted is on.
Delete this duplicated item.
7/3/2015
Page 95 of 390
Section updated:
4/13/2015
2:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-090-001.mp4
045.090.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-090-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the utility file
In the Menu Browser select the New command.
From the new file dialog select the wisdot14-etopog.dwt template file.
In the Menu Browser select the Save As command.
Browse to the 12345678/BaseData folder and save this new file as Uti-Ex.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:.
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
045.090.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-090-001-proj-dataset.zip
Clean up the utility linework
In the lower right of the drawing area, select the drawing scale menu and chose 1 IN:40 FT
For the utility feature lines that have special linetypes (those represented with letters) check to make sure the letter
in the linetype is not upside down.
When you find a linetype that is upside down, select on that feature line.
In the green context ribbon toggle open the Edit Geometry panel.
In the Edit Geometry Panel select the upper right icon, Reverse. This will reverse the direction of the
feature line so the letters appear correctly.
Continue selecting feature lines and reversing them as needed. This works on one feature line at a time.
Set the utility point labels
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, right-click the Point Group header and choose Updates.
In the toolspace, Prospector, Expand the Point Groups.
Right-click the Survey User Defined point group. Choose Properties.
In the Survey User-Defined properties dialog, Information tab, change the Point Label Style to _No
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 96 of 390
Section updated:
4/13/2015
2:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-100-001.mp4
045.100.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-100-001-proj-dataset.zip
Export the SDB to a LandXML file
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678 and choose Open for Edit.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678 and choose Export Survey LandXML.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and click Save.
Confirm the coordinate zone is set to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
** NOTE ** This process can also be performed with an import event. When this is done, the edits done in the
survey database are exported. The import event is just used as the selection set.
3:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-100-002.mp4
045.100.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-100-002-proj-dataset.zip
Import the LandXML file into the stored SDB
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678-1 and choose Open for Edit.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on SD-12345678-1 and choose the Import flyout. From the flyout choose
Import Survey LandXML.
Browse to the project 12345678/BaseData/Survey folder and select SD-12345678.xml.
Scroll down to the LandXML Data area and confirm the coordinate zone is set to Wisconsin County Systems:
Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
Section updated:
4/13/2015
2:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-110-001.mp4
045.110.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-110-001-proj-dataset.zip
Clear out file of previous survey edit work
In the Quick Access toolbar select the Open command.
In the Open dialog browse to 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and open SurveyEdits.dwg.
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, expand SD-12345678 database.
Right-click on Figures and choose Remove from Drawing.
Right-click on Survey Points and choose Points then choose Remove from Drawing.
3:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/045/045-110-002.mp4
045.110.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/045/045-110-002-proj-dataset.zip
Create a survey query
Right-click on Survey Queries and choose New.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 97 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-exercise-files.zip
5:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-010-001.mp4
050.010.001
What is a Surface?
Civil 3D object that represents elevation information
Frequently created from points (Existing Surfaces)
or imported from LandXML
or created from a corridor design (Proposed surfaces)
or created with grading tools (Proposed surfaces)
or from other surfaces (Volume Surfaces, Composite surfaces)
Vocabulary:
TIN : triangulated irregular network; the guts of virtually all surface models.
(Each triangle forms a 3D plane. Together, all these planes form a surface.)
Boundary: A boundary is added by you, the user, to restrict triangle formation.
(i.e. outer project limits or obscure area)
Border: The line formed automatically by the outermost triangle legs.
Breakline: a line, polyline, 3D polyline, feature line or figure used to represent where triangles should line up.
Examples of breakline locations:
Bottom of a ditch
Crown of a road
Top or bottom of a retaining wall
Curb flowline
Types of Surfaces
Tin Surface
Most Common
Grid Surface
Only used when bringing in Data Elevation Model (DEM) files
Grid Volume Surface
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 98 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
10/1/2012
050.020.001
050.030.001
Surface Display
Three Ways to Change a Surfaces Style:
1. Click the Surface in the graphic. Click Surface Properties from the Context Tab.
2. Right-click the surfaces name in prospector. Click Surface Properties.
3. Click the main Surfaces listing in Prospector. Click the Style field for the surface.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
10/1/2012
6:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-040-001.mp4
050.040.001
050.050.001
Boundaries
Surface models with bogus triangles before breaklines and boundaries are added
Boundaries
Reign-in surface models
Help control where triangles are created
Destructive vs. Non-Destructive
A destructive boundary removes any triangles it touches. Outer boundaries are frequently destructive.
A non-destructive boundary removes portions of triangles, but creates new triangles. Hide boundaries should
be non-destructive.
Boundary Types
Outer (most Common)
Represents extents of surface model
Prevents bogus triangles from forming
Usually destructive
There can only be one outer boundary per surface
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Page 99 of 390
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
12:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-060-001.mp4
050.060.001
Exercise
050.070 Breaklines
27:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-070-001.mp4
050.070.001
Breaklines
A line added to a surface that represents a distinct change in slope.
Enforce triangle edges (in other words, triangle sides will never cross a breakline)
Examples: curb features, crown of road, ditch, edge of pavement, etc
Types of Breaklines
Standard
Lines, 3D polylines, feature lines or figures with elevation
Contribute vertex and endpoint elevations as surface points
Can significantly change elevations
Proximity
Any line elevations are not used
Inherit vertex and endpoint elevations from nearest surface points
Use when you have linework, but no known elevation
Wall
Start with a line with elevation
Represent cliffs, retaining walls or other abrupt elevation changes
From file (FLT)
FLT file
Frequently converted from CAiCE
Once the file is imported, it acts like a standard breakline
It does not actually draw the line
Non-destructive
Not frequently used
Does not change elevation or slope
Just changes triangles
Can be used to show saw cut lines, pavement islands without grade change
Avoiding Crossing Breaklines
Crossing Breaklines Cleanup
Before Breaklines are added to definition
OVERKILL command
TRIM command
After breaklines are already added
Crossing Breakline cleanup tool
050.080.001
Editing Tools
Adding / Deleting TIN lines
Modifying triangle vertices
Swap edges
Raise/Lower
Changing the order of edits
Mid-Ordinate Distance (MOD)
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
7/1/2010
10:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-090-001.mp4
050.090.001
050.100.001
Exercise
050.110.001
7/3/2015
050.110.002
13:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-110-003.mp4
050.110.003
7/3/2015
050.110.004
Section updated:
6/17/2015
7/3/2015
2:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-130-001.mp4
050.130.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-130-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the existing surface file
050.130.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-130-002-proj-dataset.zip
Add the Topo-Ex file XREF to place an appropriate boundary
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, select the Attach icon.
In the Select Reference File dialog, browse to the project 12345678/BaseData folder and select the Topo-Ex.dwg.
In the Attach External Reference dialog:
Select the Path type of Relative
Select the Reference type of Overlay
Make sure the Scale is set to 1 (not Specify Onscreen)
Make sure the Insertion Point is X,Y,Z of 0 (not Specify Onscreen)
Make sure the Rotation is Angle 0 (not Specify Onscreen)
Click OK.
7/3/2015
050.130.003
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-130-003-proj-dataset.zip
Define the Exist surface from the mapping survey data
Translate SRV to PNT/FLT
In the Toolspace, Toolbox tab, expand WisDOT Toolbox, expand WisDOT Macros.
Right-click on SRV to PNT/FLT and choose Execute.
Browse to the project folder, 12345678\BaseData\Mapping and select Exist.SRV. Click Open.
Click OK to confirm file location.
[This step is not necessary, but is to confirm the files created from the SRV] In Windows Explorer, browse to the
project folder, 12345678\BaseData\Mapping and confirm The Exist.PNT, Exist.FLT, Exist-bldg.FLT and Existobsc.FLT were created. There may also be Exist-weak.FLT and Exist-ewbdy.FLT files created here, depending on
your project.
Add the survey points to the Exist surface
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, expand Surfaces, expand Exist, expand Definition, right-click on Point Files and
choose Add.
In the Add Point File dialog:
Select the plus sign icon in the upper right.
Browse to 12345678/BaseData/Mapping and select the Exist.SRV.pnt file. Click OK.
In the Specify Point File Format select the PENZD (space delimited) format. Click OK.
7/3/2015
Section updated:
6/17/2015
050.135.001
4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-135-002.mp4
050.135.002
2:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-135-003.mp4
050.135.003
7/3/2015
Section updated:
4/13/2015
3:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-140-001.mp4
050.140.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-140-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the field survey surface DWG file and surface
From the Menu Browser select New.
Select the wisdot14.dwt template and click OK.
From the Menu Browser select Save As.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and save the file named Surf-Ex-Survey.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save command.
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Create Ground Data panel, select the Create Surface command.
Name the surface Exist-Survey
Click OK.
Add the surface query points and figures to the survey surface file
In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the SD-12345678, and choose Open for Edit.
Expand the survey queries area.
Drag and drop the following survey queries into the file:
Surface Figres1, Surface Figures2, Surface Points1, Surface Points2, Surface Points 3, and Centerline.
3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-140-002.mp4
050.140.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-140-002-proj-dataset.zip
Create the polyline for the data clip boundary
Zoom to the location of where the Exist-Survey surface will be needed for the project.
Start the polyline command from the Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel (or type PL at the command line).
Select the first point near the surface. Continue adding polyline vertices around the surface.
When this is nearly complete, type C to close the polyline shape.
7/3/2015
050.140.003
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-140-003-proj-dataset.zip
Add the surface query points and figures as a reference to the survey surface
Create the field survey surface DWG file and surface
From the Menu Browser select New.
Select the wisdot14.dwt template and click OK.
From the Menu Browser select Save As.
Browse to the project 12345678\BaseData\Survey folder and save the file named Surf-Ex-Survey.dwg.
In the toolspace, Settings tab, right-click the name of the file (at the top).
Choose Edit Drawing Settings.
In the Units and Zone tab:
Set the coordinate zone category to USA, Wisconsin.
Set the coordinate zone to Wisconsin County Systems: Barron County, US Foot.
Click OK.
Add the surface query points and figures as a reference to the survey surface
In the Quick Access toolbar click the Save command. In the Toolspace, Survey tab, right-click on the
SD-12345678, and choose Open for Edit.
In the Survey ribbon tab, Modify panel, select the Survey Queries icon.
In the Survey Queries blue context ribbon, Manage panel, click the query name drop-down and choose
SurfacePoints1.
In the Survey Query ribbon tab, Query Results panel, select the Add to Surface icon.
In the Add to Surface dialog select the Add Query Results to this Surface drop-down and choose Exist-Survey.
Under Query Results choose Reference the Survey Database for Dynamic Query Results.
In the Use These Survey Queries select/check mark the following:
SurfacePoints1, SurfacePoints2, SurfacePoints3, SurfaceFigures1, SurfaceFigures2, and Centerlines.
Click OK.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Section updated:
4/13/2015
2:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-150-001.mp4
050.150.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-150-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create the data reference of the field survey surface
Open 12345678/BaseData/Surf-Ex.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, Data Shortcut area, expand the Surfaces area.
Right-click on the Exist-Survey surface and choose Create Reference.
Set the style to Ex Border. Click OK.
Section updated:
3/10/2014
050.190.001
18:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-190-002.mp4
7/3/2015
***CAUTION*** This segment includes a large dataset and may take a long time to download.
Create USGS DEM Surface file
Create a new dwg file from the WisDOT template and save it as Surface-USGS-DEM_meters.dwg.
In the drawing settings set the Drawing Units to Meters. Set the Zone to USA, Wisconsin and Wisconsin
County Systems: {Your project County}, Meter. Click OK.
Import the project mapping into the drawing to provide spatial reference. Refer to 160.030 for this procedure.
Draw a closed polyline around the area where the DEM Surface is needed. Make this area as small as
possible to improve system performance.
Create a new surface called USGS-DEM
Expand the surface definition in the Toolspace-Prospector.
Right click on Boundaries and select Add....
Set the Type to Data Clip. Click OK and select the closed polyline from the screen.
In the Toolspace-Prospector, right click on DEM Files under the surface definition. Select Add...
At the top of the dialogue box, select the DEM file. The file extension is ESRI Binary Grid (*.adf). You will
see multiple .adf files in the data set downloaded. Choose the one with the largest file size.
Set the CS Code to Lat Longs, NAD83 datum, Latitude-Longitude; Degrees. (Coordinate System Code is
LL83) Click OK. Civil 3D will transform the DEM surface from Lat/Long to the coordinate system assigned to
the drawing. However, it will not transform the elevations. This is why we first bring the DEM into a metric
drawing.
Click OK to finish loading the DEM file. The surface is now viewable according to the assigned style. This
may take some time depending on the point density and area.
In the Toolspace-Prospector, right click on the surface and select Export LandXML... Make sure the surface
(only the surface) is selected in the Export to LandXML dialogue box. Click OK. Save the xml file to the
BaseData\Other\USGS-DEM\ directory. Name the file USGS-DEM_meters.
Save and Close the drawing.
Create a new dwg file from the WisDOT template and save it as Surface-USGS-DEM_USFoot.dwg.
In the Drawing Settings, set the Zone to USA, Wisconsin, Wisconsin County Systems: {Your Project County},
US Foot. Click OK.
Data shortcut reference your roadway alignment or xreference your mapping to provide spatial reference.
From the Insert Tab - Import Panel, click LandXML. Select the USGS-DEM_meters.xml file and click Open.
Click OK at the Import LandXML dialogue box. The DEM surface will now appear in your drawing according to its
assigned style. Save the drawing and create a data shortcut for the surface. The DEM surface now has elevations
in feet.
Section updated:
6/17/2015
050.191.001
Introduction
Infraworks is capable of processing larger data sets. Therefore it is sometimes easier to consume DEM files,
LiDAR files, or other large sets of data in Infraworks instead of working directly in Civil 3D. Once the data is
inside Infraworks, smaller sample surfaces can be exported to Civil 3D.
Another advantage to consuming data in Infraworks is coordinate transformations. Infraworks will
automatically transform data to project specific coordinate systems. Then, when that data is exported to Civil
3D, it will appear in the correct location.
WisDOT employees can have Infraworks installed on their workstation by contacting the IT service desk.
http://dotnet/servicecatalog/procurement/pro-it-proc/index-get.htm
In this exercise, we will be using the same USGS data obtained in Module 050.190. Download the
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/050/050-190-proj-dataset.zip to follow along. Alternatively, the dem data
can be obtained from the national map viewer. http://viewer.nationalmap.gov/viewer/
In this example, we are going to download a topographic quad map and load it into the model. Aerial images
can also be used.
1. https://www.topoquest.com/find/state.php?state=WI
2. Download the Dallas and Dorrity Creek Maps
4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-002.mp4
050.191.002
7/3/2015
Since the Infraworks model will only be used for consuming data, we recommend that the
Infraworks project be kept on the users C-drive. Infraworks projects can grow quickly in size and
take up unnecessary server space.
Name the project the project ID and provide a descriptions such as the highway name and project
title.
It is important to define the model extents when practical. The model extents limit the Infraworks
model to the area of interest. Without model extents, the Infraworks model will include the entire
planet and performance would suffer. However, since the Infraworks engine can process large data,
the model extents can be set significantly larger than the project. There are several options for
setting the model extents:
Option 1: One way to obtain coordinate values for the model extents, is to open the
project mapping file in Civil 3D. Choose minimum coordinates representing a point
southwest of the expected area of interest. Choose maximum coordinates representing
a point northeast of the expected area of interest.
Option 2: The simplest way to set the model extents is with the data that will be
consumed. By clicking on the Load Extents From File button, you can select the data
that will be brought into Infraworks. The extents will be set automatically based on the
spatial limits of the data.
In this example, well select the .adf file from our USGS DEM download. These extents will be
much larger than what we will need. However, we can reduce the model extents later.
Under Advanced Setting, there are some options regarding coordinate systems. These can be left
as the default even if they do not match your project coordinate system. The UCS coordinate
system can be changed to the project coordinate system if you wish. This will display the project
coordinate system in the model. For our application, there is no need to change the database
coordinate system.
7/3/2015
1:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-003.mp4
050.191.003
Model Navigation
To navigate the model, the hold the left mouse button down to orbit. Hold the right mouse button down to
pan. Use the wheel to zoom in and out. To return to a top view with north up, hover the cursor over the view
cube and click on the home symbol. This is the default view for the home view. The home view can be
changed if desired by click in the down arrow next to the view cube.
4:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-004.mp4
050.191.004
We can now begin to load data into the model. We recommend that you load an image file (or
files) that encompasses the area of interest first. In this example, we are going to download a
topographic quad map and load it into the model. Aerial images can also be used.
1. https://www.topoquest.com/find/state.php?state=WI
2. Download the Dallas and Dorrity Creek Maps
To load the images into the model, just drag and drop the image files (one at a time) into
Infraworks.
1. Under the geolocation tab, there should not be any edits that are needed. The coordinate
system of the image should automatically load.
2. Under the Raster tab, there are no required edits. However, since in this example we are
loading a topographic quad map, we can change the classification to Topographic Map.
3. We recommend that you check the Clip to Model Extent box for all data loaded into
Infraworks.
7/3/2015
1:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-005.mp4
050.191.005
7:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-006.mp4
050.191.006
7/3/2015
Infraworks can quickly reveal these boundaries. To exaggerate the terrain, right click on the .adf file
under the data sources. Choose configure. In the geolocation tab, set the exaggeration under the z
scale. In the example, we exaggerate by 5. Click Close & Refresh. Since the terrain has been
exaggerated in the z direction, you may need to zoom out to bring it back into view. Also note, that
new terrain themes will need to be added for the exaggerated data.
6:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-007.mp4
050.191.007
2:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/050/050-191-008.mp4
050.191.008
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/060/060-exercise-files.zip
7:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-010-001.mp4
060.010.001
Introduction to Alignments
Many Ways to Develop an alignment:
From lines, arcs and/or polylines
From scratch
From points as best fit*
From existing edge lines as best fit*
*good as a starting point
Workflow:
All project alignments can go in one drawing
Use WisDOT naming convention
DWG File type: Alignments and Profiles
Description: Contains alignments and profiles
Sites
It is recommended that you do not put alignments on a Site.
Some objects need to be on a Site, but for alignments this is optional.
When alignments are together on a site, they will react to each other by forming parcels within closed areas. This
is not desirable in most cases. When alignments on separate sites form closed areas, no parcel is created.
Store in Design > AliProfs folder
All Alignments & Profile can go in the same file.
To Summarize:
Alignments are your horizontal geometry components
Represents centerline of the road in many cases
Organize your projects alignments in one or two drawings
Use <none> as your site
Section updated:
10/1/2012
9:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-020-001.mp4
060.020.001
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
20:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-030-001.mp4
060.030.001
1.
2.
3.
4.
060.030.002
7/3/2015
060.040 Fixed/Floating/Free
Section updated:
10/1/2012
13:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-040-001.mp4
060.040.001
7/3/2015
3. Turn on your Node object snap by right-clicking the osnap icon from the status bar.
4. From the Alignment layout toolbar, go to the line menu, and click Fixed Line-Two points.
1. Snap to the south most point to the next point.
2. Press enter to complete the segment.
5. From the alignment layout toolbar, go to Cures > Floating curve (from entity radius through point)
1. Click the tangent segment you created in the previous steps.
2. Type in a radius of 575. Press enter.
3. Press enter to accept the default of Less Than180.
4. Use the point to set the next point. Be sure to use node snap.
6. To create the reverse curve, go to Curves menu in the Alignment layout toolbar > More Floating Curves >
Float Curve (From Entity end through point.)
1. Select the curve.
2. Click the point that is in the intersection to complete the reverse curve.
3. Press enter to complete the command.
7. To create the next reverse curve, go to Curves menu in the Alignment layout toolbar > More Floating
Curves > Float Curve (From Entity end through point.)
1. Pick the curve you created in the previous steps.
2. Press enter to complete the alignment.
8. Go to Curves menu in the Alignment layout toolbar > Fixed Curve 3-point.
1. Use the node object snap to click the three points to make a curve. The result should be a
disconnected curve which does not have labeling on it.
2. Press enter to complete the command.
9. To close the gap, use the Line > Free line between two curves from the alignment layout toolbar.
1. Click the preceeding curve, then the curve that is not connected.
2. Press enter to complete the command.
10. Click the alignment grid (panorama) view.
1. The Tangency constraints reflect the tools we used to create the segments. These can be
unlocked to force a change.
2. Unlock the fourth element ( the third curve) by clicking the lock icon.
3. Change the Tangency constraint to Constrained by Previous.
4. Change the radius to 300.
11. Unlock the third entity (the second curve).
1. Change the type to Constrained by previous (floating).
2. Change the radius to 400.
12. Close the alignment layout toolbar.
13. Select the alignment
1. Notice that you see different sets of grips depending on the way the curve was created.
2. Experiment by changing the grips. Dont worry - if you feel you have made a mistake you can
always use the undo command to go back a step.
14. Remember that the tools you use to create n alignment will change the tools you have to modify the
alignment after it is created.
15. Save the drawing.
End of exercise.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
13:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-050-001.mp4
060.050.001
Additional Tools:
Free Curve Fillet.dwg
Station Equations,Masking, Implied Point of Intersection (PI), Constraint Editing, Free Curve Fillet
1.
2.
3.
4.
7/3/2015
intersections.
1. Click Add Masking region.
2. Snap to the tick near 310+00 and click again at 312+00.
3. There now appears to be a gap in the alignment.
4. Click Add Masking region gain.
5. Snap to station 322+00. Use endpoint snaps to pick up the end of the alignment. The Lock to end
option is automatically set.
7. Switch to the Point of Intersection Tab
1. This comes into play when Civil 3D converts a line or polyline to an alignment.
2. By Change in alignment direction will calculate an overall PI for compund curves.
3. By Individual curves and curve group will create a separate PI for each curve (similar to how it
creates a PI as you draw tangents and PIs from scratch.
4. Do not display implied points of intersection will leave out PI locations. Use this option if you
want to prevent editing of the alignment using implied PI locations. You can change this option at any
time.
5. Blue PI grips are ones that are created when a curve is placed through a free curve fillet.
6. Grey PI grips are PIs that did not start out from tangents. Usually these are located where
tangency constraints have been modified or where polylines have been converted to alignments.
7. Click the grey PI and click Solve PI. This will turn the grip to a blue PI and allow you to move the
PI normally.
8. Switch to the Constraint editing tab.
1. Always perform implied tangency constraint swapping will automatically change the tangency
constraints on an alignment segment
2. Lock all parameter Constraints In the alignment grid view, you will see that this option
automatically adds a closed lock icon (meaning it is locked) to the tangency constraint.
3. These settings do affect all alignments, not just ones that are converted from
polylines/lines/arcs.
4. In all cases, tangency is maintained for all segments.
9. Close the Alignment properties.
10. Click the alignment.
11. From the Contextual tab > click the Geometry editor.
1. Click the Free Curve Fillet (between two entities, radius)
2. Click the tangent in (low station)
3. Click the tangent out (higher station)
4. Press enter to accept the default of less than 180.
5. Key-in 300
6. Press enter to complete the command & update any labeling.
12. From the Contextual tab > click the Geometry editor.
1. Click the Free Curve Fillet (between two entities, radius)
2. Click the curve (low station)
3. Click the tangent (higher station)
4. Press enter to accept the default of less than 180.
5. Type in R for reverse, then press enter.
6. Key-in 500 and press enter.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-060-001.mp4
060.060.001
7/3/2015
Section updated:
10/1/2012
10:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-070-001.mp4
060.070.001
Design Violation
Design criteria.dwg
The warning symbol will appear on an alignment if:
A line-curve connection is not tangent
A curves radius is too small for the design speed
Superelevation table is out of date
Any design check is violated
Adding Design Speed to an Existing Alignment
1. Open the file Design criteria.dwg
2. Select the Lake Kegonsa alignment (the shorter one)
3. From the alignment contextual tab click Alignment Properties.
1. Switch to the Design criteria tab.
2. Place a checkmark next to Use Criteria based design.
3. Click the ellipsis button to select the _wisdot design criteria 2009.xml file. This file is part of the
WisDOT Civil 3D design files package that can be downloaded from the FTP site.
4. Set the radius table to WisDOT eMax 6% - 1lane.
5. Set the attainment method to Crowned roadway.
6. Verify that check for tangency between elements is checked ON.
7. Change the design speed to 30 mph.
8. Click add design speed (green plus sign.)
1. Set the start station of the new design speed to 25+00
2. Set the design speed to 45 mph.
9. Notice that you now have several radius warnings on the alignment.
10. To rectify the problem, you could change the design speed or increase the radius.
11. To ignore the problem and hide the warning symbol, click the LAYOFF button. And click one of
the symbols.
Adding a Design Speed as the Alignment is Created
1. Remain in the file Design criteria.dwg
2. From the Home tab of the ribbon > Create Design panel click alignment> Create Alignment from objects.
1. Select the polyline near the right end.
2. Press enter to accept the direction.
3. Name the alignment USH 51.
4. Leave all the rest of the options on the General tab as default.
5. Switch to the Design Criteria tab.
1. Type in 50 in the Starting design speed field.
2. Put a checkmark next to Use criteria based design.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
3. Click the ellipsis button to select the _wisdot design criteria 2009.xml file.
4. Set the radius table to WisDOT eMax 6% - 1lane.
5. Set the attainment method to Crowned roadway.
6. Leave other options as default.
6. Click OK.
3. You can view any warnings graphically or by clicking the Alignment grid view from the alignment layout
toolbar.
4. Save the file. End of exercise.
14:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-070-002.mp4
060.070.002
Superelevation
Design Criteria.dwg
7/3/2015
5. In the Shoulder control screen, set the normal shoulder width is 8 and the normal
shoulder slope is 4%.
6. Set the lowside option to Breakover removal.
7. Set the highside option to Default slopes.
8. Place a checkmark next to Maximum shoulder rollover and set the value to 8%.
9. Click next.
10. In the Attainment method area, verify that the same design criteria file is
selected by clicking the ellipsis.
11. Set the Superelevation rate table to WisDOT eMax 6%.
12. Set the transition length table to 1laneRamp, 2laneUndiv@CL
13. Set the attainment method to crowned roadway.
14. Leave all other values as default.
15. Click Finish.
5. You should now see the Superelevation table complete with stations and Superelevation stage
name.
6. This table can be used to override calculated values. You can change the length, station, and/or
lane & shoulder slopes depending on your needs.
7. Close the table by clicking the green checkmark.
8. The Superelevation table can be revisited by clicking Superelevation > View tabular editor from
the alignment contextual tab.
9. When changes to the geometry occur, you will see a warning symbol indicating that the
superelevtion needs to be recalculated.
10. From the alignment contextual tab, click superelevtion > Calculate/edit superelevation.
1. Advance through the curves by clicking Next at the top of the Superelevation curve
manager.
2. Observe the Superelevation status at the bottom of the Superelevation curve manager for
confirmation of the curve situation.
3. Click Recalculate for ny curves that report s Out of Date.
4. Click Continue to recalculate when warned that manual edits will be overwritten.
11. Save the file.
End of exercise.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
6:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-080-001.mp4
060.080.001
7/3/2015
2. Select the alignment you wish to offset. From the contextual tab launch pad panel > Create Offset
Alignment.
1. Name template
2. Station range for the offset
3. Number of offsets on each side (set this to zero if you wish to omit an alignment from one of the
sides.
4. Incremental offset distance on each side - this is the distance from the centerline.
3. Grip edit the centerline and observe that the offset alignments follow.
4. Changing the type of alignment (in the alignment properties > Information tab), will disconnect the offset
from the parent alignment.
5. To make an offset of the offset, select the offset alignment and pick offset alignment again.
1. Set the number of offsets to the left to 0.
2. Set the distance to 1.5. this new offset will represent the back of curb.
3. Click OK.
6. Repeat the process for the left (north) side of the alignment.
7. Save the file.
13:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-080-002.mp4
060.080.002
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
30:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-100-001.mp4
Veritcal Alignment)
Alignments are CRITICAL to the overall Civil 3D Object Model
Alignments do not have dependencies, but have several Objects that are depend upon them.
Child Objects directly dependent upon Alignments:
Profiles
Profile Views
Sample Line Groups
Sample Lines
Section Views
Materials quantities
Objects that use Alignments and have dynamic relationship with them:
Corridors
Intersections
Pipe Networks
Alignments as they relate to CAiCE
CAiCE Geometry chain with annotation turned off = Civil 3D Alignment without labels
CAiCE Geometry chain with annotation turned on = Civil 3D Alignment with labels
Things that are WAY different than CAiCE (or any other product for that matter)
Civil 3D has dynamic relationship between Alignments and other objects that use Alignments (Corridors,
Intersections). When the Alignment changes, objects that use that Alignment can change as well.
Civil 3D is a true Object model. Child objects such as Profiles, Profile Views, Sample Lines, etc. can change
when an Alignment changes. Note: for this reason it is very important to get your Alignments location,
stationing, and equations correct before creating the Child objects.
Centerline Alignments
Most commonly used to create Profile views, Profiles, Sample Line Groups, Sections, Section Views and
Quantities.
Used as Baselines for the Corridor Object.
Used as Main or Secondary Roads for Intersection Object.
Possibly a Parent of an Offset Alignment
Centerline Alignment properties
Name
Style, Labels
Station Control, Station Equation(s), Mask(s)
Design Speed, Design Criteria, Design check set
Superelevation
Offset Alignments
Child of Centerline or possibly some other Offset Alignment
Represent Targets such as Pavement Edges, Shoulder Edges
Can have Widenings
Most do not have Station Labels
Can have Profiles, Profile Views, Sample Line Groups
Attributes
Name
Style, Labels
Station Control, Station Equation(s), Mask(s)
Design Speed, Design Criteria, Design check set
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Superelevation
Offset Parameters
Can set Update Mode to Dynamic or Static
Can lock to Geometry or stationing of Parent Alignment
Miscellaneous Alignments
Possibly used as Matchlines for Quantities, Pipe Alignments, Special Ditching, other Roadway Features
Does not have Design Criteria or Superelevation
Can have Profiles, Profile Views, Sample Line Groups
Attributes
Name
Style, Labels
Station Control, Station Equation(s), Mask(s)
7/3/2015
Note: we are flexible with our file naming. Not so flexible with our project folder structure. Biggest thing to
remember is to name files so others can figure out what they contain. Placing files in the proper project folder is a
great start!
7/3/2015
How to use Design Criteria for Alignment Super and Minimum Curve Radii
Best Fit Alignments by Layout
Bringing stuff through Xreferences
Polyline
Create Alignment from Polyline
Alignments by Layout
Precision input
Osnaps and Otrack
Transparent Commands
Best Fit
Quick Properties
Station Equations
Get to know Alignment Layout Tools
22:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-100-003.mp4
060.100.003
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
060.110.001
2:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-002.mp4
060.110.002
Create DWG
5:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-003.mp4
060.110.003
Import points
1:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-004.mp4
060.110.004
Create alignment
5:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-005.mp4
060.110.005
5:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-006.mp4
060.110.006
3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-007.mp4
060.110.007
6:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-008.mp4
060.110.008
3:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-009.mp4
060.110.009
4:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-010.mp4
060.110.011
Adjust stationing
4:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-012.mp4
060.110.012
4:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-013.mp4
060.110.013
Set superelevation
6:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-110-014.mp4
060.110.014
(48:52)
Apply superelevation macro
Section updated:
7/1/2010
060.120.001
1:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-002.mp4
060.120.002
Create DWG
3:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-003.mp4
060.120.003
Import points
2:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-004.mp4
060.120.004
4:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-005.mp4
060.120.005
1:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-006.mp4
060.120.006
5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-007.mp4
060.120.007
5:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-008.mp4
060.120.008
6:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-009.mp4
060.120.009
5:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-120-010.mp4
060.120.010
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
3:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-001.mp4
060.130.001
1:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-002.mp4
060.130.002
Open AliProf4thAve.dwg
4:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-003.mp4
060.130.003
4:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-004.mp4
060.130.004
4:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/060/060-130-005.mp4
060.130.005
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
070.010.001
15:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-010-002.mp4
070.010.002
AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-12.dwg
Exercise
070.020.001
AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-13.dwg
Proposed (Layout) Profile Overview
Layout/Proposed profiles, not related to a surface
Generally for design purposes
Ties back to alignment
Layout profile toolbar
Home tab > Create Design > Profile > Profile Creation Tools
Layout Profile Creation dialog
Alignment name/Naming template
General tab
Profile Style
Profile Label Set
Design Criteria tab
Use Criteria-based toggle
Design criteria file
Design tables from that file
Design check set toggle and assignment
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
14:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-030-001.mp4
070.030.001
AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-14.dwg
Graphical Editing of Editing Layout Profiles
Grip Editing
Fixing Design Criteria Errors
Square grips for maintaining slopes
Circular grips for adjusting curve radius/length
Triangle grips for adjusting PVI point
Triangles at angles maintain incoming or outgoing slope
Upright triangle changes both slopes while adjusting PVI
Data Editing of Layout Profiles
Edit in Table (Panorama View)
Profile Layout Tools toolbar, right side
Data grid of entire profile, curves and slopes
Some fields are informational, most can be edited
Edit in Table per curve
Add/Remove PVI points
Copy Profile
Raise/Lower Profile
070.040.001
AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-15.dwg
Profile View Properties
For looking at details of the view, and list of profiles that are available for display
Access to the grid parameters, stations and elevations
Band information and settings, elevation label assignments
Hatching associated in the selected view
Access to the current style
To access profile view properties
Select on the profile views grid
Context ribbon > Modify View > Profile View Properties
Section updated:
10/1/2012
8:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-050-001.mp4
070.050.001
AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-16.dwg
Profile View Labels
Labels specific to the Profile View (grid)
Types of Labels
Station Elevation
Depth
Projection
Profile View Labels Placement
Placing labels
Select the profile view > green context ribbon > Labels panel > Add View Labels
Or Annotate tab > Add Labels > Profile View
Add Profile View Labels in fly out
Station Elevation, you will first identify the station, then the elevation
Depth, you will identify two points. The Depth will be the Y-axis measurement between the two
Adjusting labels after placement
Station Elevations have two grips
Square is for dragged state with leader
Diamond grip for moving label location
Depth label has three grips
Endpoints for adjusting depth measurements
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Section updated:
10/1/2012
9:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-060-001.mp4
070.060.001
11:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-060-002.mp4
070.060.002
AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-17.dwg
Exercise
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
11:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-070-001.mp4
070.070.001
AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-18.dwg
Projecting Objects into Profile Views
Displays objects from plan view into the vertical geometry of profile view
Can project C3D Points, and Feature Lines
Can display at true elevations, or at an assigned elevation
Section updated:
10/1/2012
Section updated:
7/1/2010
8:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-080-001.mp4
070.080.001
AliProfSTH25-Best-Fit-12.dwg
Quick Profiles
A profile created from non-alignment lines or polylines
Temporary profile deletes itself when you close the file
View changes as you move the line/polyline
Great for troubleshooting design issues
Home > Create Design > Profile > Quick Profile
070.090.001
7/3/2015
Layout Profiles
Most commonly used as Corridor Baselines, Corridor Targets, Main or Secondary Road Profile in an
Intersection Object
Can be Displayed in Profile View
Can be Superimposed on another Profile View
Can be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Static as it does not change VPIs when Parent Alignment changes
Created using Profile Layout Tools
Remember Fixed, Floating, Free!
Layout Profile properties
Name
Style, Labels
Design Criteria, Design check set
Surface Profiles
Can be used as a Corridor Baseline profile
Can be used as a Corridor Target profile
Can be Displayed in Profile View
Can be Superimposed on another Profile View
Cannot be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Created projecting Alignment onto Surface
Dynamic as it changes if Parent Alignment or Surface changes
Surface Profile properties
Name
Style, Labels
Superimposed Profiles
Can be used as a Corridor Baseline profile
Can be used as a Corridor Target profile
Can be Displayed in Profile View
Cannot be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Created using Create Superimposed Profile
Dynamic as it changes when the Original Profile changes
Superimposed Profile properties
Name
Style, Labels
Corridor Profiles
Can be used as a Corridor Baseline profile
Can be used as a Corridor Target profile
Can be Displayed in Profile View
Can be edited in the using Profile Layout tools
Created using Create Profile from Corridor
Static as it does not change when the Corridor changes
Note: we do not have Corridor Profiles in WisDOT workflow
Corridor Profile properties
Name
Style, Labels
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Profile Views
Profile Views are Dependent upon a Parent Alignment. They display
Profiles
Data bands
Grids
Pipe Networks
Points
Profile View properties
Name
Profile View Style
Station Range
Elevation Range
Split Profile View
Included Profiles
Profile View Bands
Hatching
5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-002.mp4
070.090.002
7/3/2015
If sharing Alignments with outside organizations or across projects Profiles can be saved to LandXML files and
shared
Profiles Need to Know!!!
When creating an Profiles using Layout tools there are three words you will hear a LOT.
Fixed
Float
Free
It is very important to understand these concepts. The geometry you create (Lines and Curves) can be changed
based on how they were created.
Fixed line or curve has no point of tangency such as a curve through three points. These Lines or Curves maintain
their relationship to how they were originally stored regardless of how you edit them
Float(ing) line or curve has one point of tangency such as a curve at the end of a line. If the line changes the curve
is adjusted to maintain tangency
Free line or curve has two points of tangency such as a line between two curves. If one curve changes the free line
changes with it.
4:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-003.mp4
070.090.003
7:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-004.mp4
070.090.004
Profile example
7:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-005.mp4
070.090.005
Profile exercise
11:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-090-006.mp4
070.090.006
Profile example
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
070.100.001
3:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-002.mp4
070.100.002
2:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-003.mp4
070.100.003
1:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-004.mp4
070.100.004
Create profile
5:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-005.mp4
070.100.005
6:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-006.mp4
070.100.006
2:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-007.mp4
070.100.007
6:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-008.mp4
070.100.008
3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-009.mp4
070.100.009
2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-010.mp4
070.100.010
4:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-011.mp4
070.100.011
2:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-100-012.mp4
070.100.012
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
070.110.001
3:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-002.mp4
070.110.002
1:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-003.mp4
070.110.003
1:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-004.mp4
070.110.004
Create profile
5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-005.mp4
070.110.005
4:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-006.mp4
070.110.006
4:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-007.mp4
070.110.007
3:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-008.mp4
070.110.008
2:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-009.mp4
070.110.009
2:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-110-010.mp4
Section updated:
4/13/2015
070.120.001
4:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-120-002.mp4
070.120.002
7/3/2015
1:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/070/070-120-003.mp4
070.120.003
Save the drawing and create a data shortcut of the Crdr-25-Setup-ETW-Top surface. Note: In your surface build
options set your maximum triangle length to be shorter than your longest corridor frequency, but longer than your
shortest corridor frequency. In this case this length should be anywhere between 199 and 3. This way the triangles
would be excluded at a length of 200 and greater. This allows a surface which will only build in our particular area
of interest, the intersections, which have a frequency of 2.5.
This surface can now be used as a data reference into any drawing where you need to create an offset alignment
profile that represents the cross slope and superelevation design.
080.010 Subassemblies
Section updated:
10/1/2012
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/080/080-exercise-files.zip
9:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-010-001.mp4
080.010.001
Introduction to Corridors
What is a Corridor?
A corridor is a Civil 3D object that ties together your design data in an intelligent manner.
Corridors frequently represent roadways, railways, trails and even streams.
A corridor contains instructions on how your typical cross-section relates to existing surface and
where those instructions should be applied.
A 3D object that brings together:
Horizontal information: Alignment
Vertical information: Profile
Cross-section information: Assemblies
Assembly:
Contains information for cross-section geometry
Pavement widths and depths
Slope to existing surface
Behavior in cut and/or fill
Usually consist of multiple sub-assemblies
Assembly:
Contains information for cross-section geometry
Pavement widths and depths
Slope to existing surface
Behavior in cut and/or fill
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
General Workflow
Save the file in the Design > Corridors folder
Name the file per WisDOT naming standards
DWG File type:
Description:
Name:
Example:
Comment:
Corridors
Contains corridors
Corridor-<CorridorName>-<Comments>
Corridor-STH25-4thAve-96to114.dwg
Belongs in (Proj ID)(Design)(Corridors)
16:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-010-002.mp4
080.010.002
7/3/2015
Sub-assembly anatomy
Marker points: Connect between frequency stations to form feature lines
Links: lines that will be used in design surfaces
Shapes: area inside a closed group of links (used for material computation)
7/3/2015
8:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-010-003.mp4
080.010.003
7/3/2015
3. Verify that the side is set to left and click to place the subassembly to the left of the curb
and gutter subassembly. This will result in an overall terrace width of 7 because the curb
and gutter has a 5 terrace built into it.
3. Switch back to the WisDOT subassemblies and add the daylight subassembly called
GenCFFinalLink.
5. Switch to the Lanes tab.
1. Click the GenericPavementStructure subassembly.
2. Set the width to 5
3. Set the shift width to 0
4. Set the crossslope to 2%.
5. Verify that the side is left.
6. Set the depth to 0.67
7. Zoom in and click the bottom inside marker on the sidewalk. The sidewalk should now have
subbase.
6. Press Escape.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
8:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-020-001.mp4
080.020.001
7/3/2015
Section updated:
10/1/2012
16:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-030-001.mp4
080.030.001
7/3/2015
Section updated:
10/1/2012
17:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-040-001.mp4
080.040.001
7/3/2015
080.040.002
Section updated:
10/1/2012
11:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-050-001.mp4
080.050.001
Corridor Targets
12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [targets].dwg
A null assembly is simply an empty placeholder that can be used to prevent feature lines from jumping across a
region. This is used in bridge locations or through intersections.
1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [targets].dwg. Even if you have successfully completed previous
exercises, switch to this file. The example file has the subassemblies renamed on all assemblies to make
creating targets easier.
2. Select the corridor.
3. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties. (You can also get to Corridor properties by rightclicking on the corridor name from Prospector.)
4. Click the Parameters tab.
1. Select the first region.
2. Click the Elipsis in the target column.
3. Locate the Width target for the Lane - L (2) subassembly.
4. Click the field that currently says <None>
5. From the alignment listing, highlight the alignment called USH 51 Best Fit From Exist - Left
6. Click Add. Be sure the alignment appears in the listing below.
7. Click OK.
8. Repeat the process for the right side of the assembly.
9. Click OK to complete the target mapping.
10. Repeat the process for the second and third regions.
5. Click OK to allow the corridor to rebuild.
6. Observe the difference in frequencies by examining the drawing.
Rebuild Your Corridor
7. Select one of the offset alignments.
1. Use the triangular grip to change the offset distance. Any arbitrary change will work for this
example.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Section updated:
6/17/2015
19:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-060-001.mp4
080.060.001
Corridor Surfaces
12345678\Design\Corridors\Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [surface].dwg
** NOTE ** Since this recording, WisDOT no longer allows links in the definition of design surface models. See
http://roadwaystandards.dot.wi.gov/standards/fdm/15-05.pdf#fd15-5-7 for current design surface model
requirements and ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3dhelp.pdf#Roadway_Modeling_Workflow_Tips_ for reasons why this decision was made.
You will need to add boundaries for each corridor surface separately.
Corridor surface creation options vary depending on the complexity of the corridor.
Add Automatically
Corridor Extents as Outer Boundary
Add Interactively
Building a Top Surface
1. Open the file Corridor USH 51 Best Fit [surface].dwg. Even if you have successfully completed previous
exercises, switch to this file. The example file has a completed corridor that is ready to add surfaces to.
2. Select the corridor.
3. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties. (You can also get to Corridor properties by rightclicking on the corridor name from Prospector.)
4. Click the Surfaces tab.
1. Click the leftmost button to create a new surface.
2. Click in the name field and rename the surface to Top-USH51.
3. From the Data Type pull down, select Feature Lines.
4. From the Specify Code menu, select Crown.
5. Click the plus sign to the right of the code.
6. Repeat steps c-e for the following feature lines:
1. Daylight
2. EPS
3. ES_Unpaved
4. ETW
5. SGSP
6. SI
If you were to click OK at this point you would have a surface created but the surface would extend beyond the
corridor.
Adding a Boundary
5. Switch to the Boundaries tab.
1. Right click on the name of the surfaces listed.
2. Select Add Automatically > Daylight.
5. Click OK.
You should now have a corridor surface that does not extend beyond any of the frequency lines. By adding the
daylight feature line as a boundary, the surface is reigned in.
Datum Surfaces
7. Select the corridor that is associated with Lake Kegonsa Road.
8. From the corridor contextual tab, Click Corridor Properties.
9. Click the Surfaces tab.
1. Click the leftmost button to create a new surface.
1. Click in the name field and rename the surface to Datum-Kegonsa.
2. Set the surface style to CRDR Datum Border
2. Verify that the Data type says Links.
3. From the Specify Code menu, select Datum.
4. Click the plus sign to the right of the code.
5. From the Data Type pull down, select Feature Lines.
6. From the Specify Code menu, select Crown_Sub.
7. Click the plus sign to the right of the code.
8. Repeat steps c-e for the following feature lines:
1. Daylight
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
6.
7.
8.
9.
2. ETW_Sub
9. Click OK.
Switch to the Boundaries tab.
1. Right click on the name of the surfaces listed.
2. Select Add Automatically > Daylight.
Click OK.
Back in plan view, click the corridor.
From the corridor contextual tab click Section Editor.
1. In the section editor contextual tab > View tools panel, click Zoom to Extents.
2. The magenta line in the view represents the datum surface.
You should see that there is a problem with how Civil 3D is interpreting the surface at the curbs
subbase. This is a common problem caused by the subbase extension beyond the back of the
concrete part of the curb. Civil 3D surfaces cannot contain caves or vertical faces. The tolerance for
being vertical is 0.001. If the geometry of the subassembly would cause a vertical surface or a cave
as the subbase extension does, the surface gets confused trying to resolve it.
This is a very common situation and is easy to correct.
Overhang Correction
14. From the Section Editor contextual tab, click Close.
15. Select the Lake Kegonsa corridor and return to corridor properties.
1. On the Surfaces tab, locate the Overhang correction column.
2. Change the overhang correction to Bottom Links.
3. Click OK and let the corridor rebuild.
10. From the corridor contextual tab click Section Editor.
1. In the section editor contextual tab > View tools panel, click Zoom to Extents.
11. The magenta line in the view represents the datum surface.
Now the datum surface is in the correct location and no longer zig zags past the back of curb.
Save the drawing. End of exercise.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
14:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-070-001.mp4
080.070.001
Section Editor
In the previous exercise section editor was used to examine the result of the corridor surface. Section editor is a
powerful tool that is capable of much more than just observation.
From section editor you can view every frequency station to view and edit the result of the corridor design.
Section editor shows the section but is NOT related to plotting cross section sheets.
Section editor is a data-driven view that is used to modify the design if necessary. From section editor you can
override subassembly geometry and force daylight slopes to tie into a specific location. Modifications can be made
both numerically (using the parameter editor) and/or graphically (grip edits).
Tips for Working in Section Editor
Be sure any surfaces you wish to view are not set to No Display styles.
Use the Station listing at in the Contextual tab to move between stations.
Perform numeric edits in the parameter editor before making graphic edits
Show both plan and section by using the viewport configuration.
Turn the UCSFOLLOW setting to 0. This will prevent the viewports from resetting every
time you switch views.
Always close the Section editor before closing the file or exiting Civil 3D.
If this cannot be avoided, reset plan view by going to the View tab and changing the view to
Top and changing the named UCS to World.
7/3/2015
Station Selection
5. From the Section Editor contextual tab > Station Selection Panel click the station listing pull-down.
1. Pick station 200+50 from the list.
2. If necessary, click Zoom to Extents from the Section Editor contextual tab >View Tools panel.
Parameter Editor
6. From the Section Editor contextual tab > Corridor Edit Tools , click Parameter Editor
1. Locate the parameter listing for Shoulder - R
2. Change the Paved shoulder width to 6
3. Press enter
4. Wait a moment while the graphic updates.
5. Repeat steps 6b-6d for Shoulder - L
7. Turn on your object snaps and make sure endpoint is one of the active snaps.
Graphic Edits
8. Hold down control key as you click the 4:1 daylight slope on the right side of the assembly.
1. Click the square grip on the rightmost end of the daylight link.
2. Drag the grip over so that the daylight slope is actually sloping down to the existing surface.
3. Use the endpoint snap to place the line.
9. Repeat steps 8a-8c for the left side of the subassembly.
10. Press escape to clear any remaining selections.
11. From the Section Editor contextual tab > Corridor Edit Tools, click Apply to Station Range.
1. Apply the changes you have just made to the stations 200+50 to 202+00.
2. Click OK.
12. From the Section Editor contextual tab, click Close.
Viewing/Deleting Station Overrides
13. Back in plan view, select the corridor.
14. From the Corridor contextual tab, click Corridor Properties.
1. On the parameters tab, locate the overrides column. (You may have to scroll over).
2. Click the ellipsis button in the Overrides column.
3. All stations from 200+50 to 202+00 are listed with checkmarks in both columns for the override
type.
4. If you wish to remove the overrides for any station, highlight the station and click the red X at the
bottom of the dialog box.
Click Ok.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
19:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-080-001.mp4
080.080.001
7/3/2015
rebuilds. While the corridor is rebuilding you cannot do any other tasks. It is much better to leave the option off and
rebuild when you are ready.
3. After you use the rebuild command, you will see panorama pop up and list many warnings and errors.
Notice that you have a long listing of warnings and at each station where the error occurs. You will see the
message twice at each station because of the left and right sides of the assembly.
Corridor Messages and Fixes
This is not a comprehensive list of corridor warning messages, however the warning messages listed are very
common and are easy to address.
Message: Clear zone point falls inside attachment point, probably because Offset to Measure Clear Zone From
parameter is too small or big (is it on the other side of alignment?)
Is it a big deal? No.
Meaning/Source: Your corridor will still be created, however you will not have a Clear Zone feature line
created for use in other places.
Fix: Go into the Assembly Properties and set the Offset to Measure Clear Zone to the ETW of your lanes on
both sides.
Message: Rotation point falls inside attachment point, probably because Offset to Measure. Rotation Point From
parameter is too small or big (is it on the other side of alignment?)
Is it a big deal: No
Meaning/Source: The rotation point is only used in fill situations to figure out if a single slope to the surface
is needed or two slopes. It is easier to think of it as a test point. If this test point is higher than the Max
Height (10 by default) a shallow AND a steep slope are created. The test is only used on the right side of the
baseline.
Fix: On the right side of the assembly, set the Offset to Measure Rotation Point from to the ETW of your
right lane. If you are only getting this on the left side of your assembly, you can completely ignore this.
Message:
Is it a big deal: The distance between surface and attachment point is too close, use cut situation instead of
fill situation.
Meaning/Source: No.
Fix: In places where your test point is very close to the existing surface the software automatically treats the
section as if it is in cut. Despite the wording, this has already been done and no action is needed by you.
Message: Failed. Point Outside Surface.
Is it a big deal: Yes.
Meaning/Source: Your daylight is not steep enough or you have run out of surface model.
Fix: Change the daylight slope or extend the surface model information.
Message: Intersection with target could not be computed. Cannot find intersection with surface using flat rate
slope when trying to construct final link!
Is it a big deal: Yes.
Meaning/Source: There are two main reasons for this common error:
1. Your design profile is longer than your surface profile.
2. You have run out of surface model (i.e. it is too narrow in the area of your corridor).
Fix:
1. Reign in your corridor stations.
2. a) Change your daylight slope.
b) Check surface model location.
Message: Failed. Value does not fall within the expected range.
Is it a big deal:Yes
Meaning/Source: There are three main reasons for this error:
Your design profile is longer than your surface profile.
You have run out of surface model (i.e. it is too narrow in the area of your corridor)
One of the subassembly values is bad.
Fix:
1. Reign in your corridor stations.
2. a) Change your daylight slope.
b) Check surface model location.
3. See if there are zeroed out values that Civil 3D does not like.
Message: Macro file not found at original path specified in subassembly. Updated macro file location to path
defined by AECCCONTENT_DIR environment variable.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Is it a big deal: No
Meaning/Source: This error can be outright ignored. It simply means that the assembly was originally created
on another computer whose paths are different from your computer. It could also mean or an older version of
Civil 3D and then updated.
Fix: There is no fix for this. Just ignore it.
Message: No sideslope intersect found.
Is it a big deal: Yes.
Meaning/Source: There are two main reasons for this common error:
1. Your design profile is longer than your surface profile.
2. You have run out of surface model (i.e. it is too narrow in the area of your corridor)
Fix:
1. Reign in your corridor stations.
2. a) Change your daylight slope.
b) Check surface model location.
Message: Target object not found TargetDTM.
Is it a big deal: Yes.
Meaning/Source: You probably just forgot to set the Target Surface to your existing surface.
Fix: Go back into corridor properties and set the target surface.
4. At the top of the Panorama window, click the Action Menu.
5. Click Clear All events.
Using Object Viewer as Diagnosis Tool
6. Select the corridor.
7. From the contextual tab, click Object viewer.
8. Use your left mouse button or the view cube to rotate the view into an isometric view. Observe the problems
and close the object viewer.
Reigning in the Corridor Station Range
If you look at the profile, you will see that the length of the existing ground is longer than the length of the design
profile. This is frequently the case. The fix is to change the processing range of the region where the error occurs.
9. Select the corridor and get into the corridor properties.
1. Click the Align
2. Set the start station of the region to 0+64.53.
3. Set the end station of the region to 8+50.
4. Click OK.
10. The corridor is now rebuilt. Return to the object viewer using the instructions from the previous step. You
should observe that the waterfalls are now gone.
Checking Targets & Using Section Editor
11. The cyan boundary is the surface model. There is a hide boundary interfering with the daylighting of the
surface from approximately 2+50 to 3+50.
12. Select the corridor. Go to Section editor.
1. Jump to station 2+75.
2. Open parameter editor.
3. Change the left side Daylight LEFT subassembly Flat Rate of Cut Slope to 6:1.
4. Click Apply to a station range.
1. The start station should already be 2+75
2. Set the End station to 3+00
3. Click OK.
5. Close section editor.
Checking the Assembly
13. Zoom into the assembly.
14. Select the main assembly.
15. Click Assembly Properties.
1. Go to the Construction tab
2. Highlight DAYLIGHT RIGHT. On the right side of the dialog box you will see a list of codes and input
values.
1. Place a checkmark next to Offset to Measure Clear Zone From.
2. Change the Get Value From Column to LANE RIGHT.Offset of ETW_Sub
3. Place a checkmark next to Offset to Measure Rotation point from.
4. Change the Get Value From Column to LANE RIGHT.Offset of ETW_Sub
3. Click OK.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
16. Open panorama if it is not already open. (Home tab > Palettes panel flyout and click the panorama icon.)
17. At the top of the Panorama window, click the Action Menu.
18. Click Clear All events.
19. Rebuild the corridor.
At this point you should have no errors when the corridor rebuilds.
Suppressing Panorama
Once you become VERY GOOD at creating and troubleshoot corridors, you can keep the panorama from popping
up. When you need to see panorama, at any time you can go to the Home tab > Palettes panel flyout and click the
panorama icon.
20. In the settings tab of the Toolspace locate the drawing name.
1. Right-click on the drawing name and select Edit Drawing Settings.
2. Switch to the Ambient Settings tab.
3. Expand the General category.
4. Set the Show Event Viewer option to No.
5. Click OK.
Save the drawing. End of Exercise.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
12:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-090-001.mp4
080.090.001
7/3/2015
Section updated:
7/1/2010
6:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-001.mp4
080.100.001
7/3/2015
080.100.002
WisDOT Standards
WisDOT10 drawing template (WisDOT10.DWT) contains:
Corridor styles
Code sets
Command Settings for Corridor creation
Layers and symbology for Corridors, Assemblies, Corridor Surfaces, etc
Naming Corridor Object
<Main Road>-<Secondary Road>-<Comment>
STH25-4thAve-Approaches
Naming Assembly object
<Road Descr>-<Comment>-<Comment>
STH25-PartSection-DaylightLeft
2Lane-FullSection
Curb Return
Naming Subassemblies within an Assembly
<Comment>-<Subassembly Name>-<Comment>-<Side>
LaneInsideSuper-Inside-Right
2LaneFullSection-LaneInsideSuper-Left
Naming Corridor Surfaces
<Corridor Main Road Name>-Corridor-<Surface Name>
STH25-Corridor-Datum
Corridor Frequency this is the frequency (or spacing) in which an Assembly will be dropped along a Baseline in a
given Region. WisDOT drawing template is set up for frequencies in Design speeds of >= 55 MPH:
50 ft on Tangents, Horizontal Curves and Vertical Curves
5 ft within intersections
When roadway is in horizontal and vertical tangency, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 50 for all Design Speeds
When roadway is on a horizontal curve:
Design Speed <= 30mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 10 (2 ft within intersection)
35mph <= Design Speed <= 55mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 25 (5 ft within intersection)
Design Speed >= 60 mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 50 (5 ft within intersection)
When roadway is on a vertical curve:
Design Speed <= 30mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 10
35mph <= Design Speed <= 50mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 25
Design Speed >= 55 mph, Maximum Corridor Frequency = 50
Add frequency lines for all horizontal geometry points, superelevation transition points, profile geometry points, and
profile high/low points.
Designer to add frequency lines at other points of interest such as change of typical section, critical drainage
location, etc.
For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Corridors are shared using Xreferences.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Only allows the ability to create Sample Lines, Sections, Section Views and Materials Quantities
Cross Project Object interaction with Corridors is available by creating Alignments, Profiles, and Surfaces
from the Corridor and sharing as Data Shortcuts
WisDOT workflow addresses this issue.
Corridors are unique and can only be shared with outside organizations if they use Civil 3D that accepts the current
version of the DWG file
Objects derived from Corridors can be shared with outside organizations using LandXML or possibly other custom
formats within Civil 3D Reports or Subscription Advantage Pack
Corridors - Need to Know!!!
Keep good project organization. Corridors are made up of several objects, changing one Object can greatly affect
the Corridor.
Corridors are used to Create Proposed surfaces. Surfaces are used for many things, including Materials Quantities
and Section Views. It is very important to get good accurate Corridor (etc) surfaces so pay close attention to the
surfaces as they are created.
Corridors can be copied within a DWG file or across a DWG file. This is NOT recommended!
Do not change a Baseline Alignments stationing after it has been used in a Corridor. It could cause problems in the
Corridor or make it obsolete. Try to ensure your Alignment stationing, station equations and location are set before
creating objects using that Alignment.
Corridors can become HUGE. Managing them is imperative:
Do not try to put a HUGE Corridor with multiple intersections in one Corridor. Break it up.
Probably a good idea to only model Roadway approaches and one intersection per Corridor object.
It is harder to manage, but with some work a user can create multiple Corridor Drawing files to make each
file more efficient. Corridors Create Surfaces which are accessible
Stock vBook content
Shows how to create Corridor surfaces using Links. WisDOT workflow promotes the use of Corridor Feature
Lines to create GOOD Corridor Surfaces.
Mentions over modeling your Corridor using closely spaced Corridor Frequencies and that the output of a
Corridor is Sections. This is not true for Wisconsin DOT. We are constructing Corridor models with the idea
they will be usable directly in Automate Machine Guidance with little or no supplemental work. Our Corridor
Frequencies are established with this in mind.
Places emphasis on making sure Baseline Alignments are set before using them as Baselines in a Corridor
Shows how to Explode objects. Do not get in the habit of exploding objects in your Drawing file.
Places emphasis on Creating styles and label styles. Do not worry about these, WisDOT has standard styles
and label styles in the drawing template, use them. If you have need for a new style or label style contact your
local support or Methods Development to get them incorporated into the standard.
Corridors Need to Know!!!
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
support.cae@dot.wi.gov
9:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-003.mp4
080.100.003
7/3/2015
Frequency
Targets
Turn off Regions that have already been worked on. Turn the other Baselines and Regions back on after you are
done editing
Select and Edit Regions Directly
Corridor Feature Lines
Spikes, waterfalls , gaps/transitions and other problems
Code set styles
9:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-004.mp4
080.100.004
9:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-005.mp4
080.100.005
9:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-100-006.mp4
080.100.006
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
080.110.001
1:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-002.mp4
080.110.002
8:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-003.mp4
080.110.003
6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-004.mp4
080.110.004
5:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-005.mp4
080.110.005
2:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-006.mp4
080.110.006
4:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-007.mp4
080.110.007
4:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-008.mp4
080.110.008
3:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-009.mp4
080.110.009
1:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-010.mp4
080.110.010
Mirror subassemblies
1:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-011.mp4
080.110.011
080.110.012
Label assembly
3:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-013.mp4
080.110.013
Rename subassemblies
3:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-014.mp4
080.110.014
4:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-015.mp4
080.110.015
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-110-016.mp4
080.110.016
Label assembly
Section updated:
7/1/2010
Section updated:
3/1/2013
080.120.001
2:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-002.mp4
080.120.002
5:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-003.mp4
080.120.003
Create corridor 1
4:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-004.mp4
080.120.004
Create corridor 2
3:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-005.mp4
080.120.005
Review corridor
6:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-006.mp4
080.120.006
6:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-007.mp4
080.120.007
5:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-008.mp4
080.120.008
3:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-120-009.mp4
080.120.009
Review corridor
The attached pdf contains guidance on using WisDOT subassemblies that are superelevation-aware. AutoDesk
subassemblies that are superelevation-aware use an alignment attribute called Axis of Rotation (AOR). WisDOT
subassemblies were created prior to the development of AOR and can work incorrectly if not used as described in
the documentation.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
While most WisDOT and AutoDesk subassemblies work together, the superelevation-aware subassemblies (lanes
and shoulders) should never be used together. Please read the following documentation for further information.
Section updated:
3/1/2013
Section updated:
3/1/2013
7/3/2015
1:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-001.mp4
080.140.001
2:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-002.mp4
080.140.002
8:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-003.mp4
080.140.003
7:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-004.mp4
080.140.004
6:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-140-005.mp4
080.140.005
080.150.001
8:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-002.mp4
080.150.002
1:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-003.mp4
080.150.003
5:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-004.mp4
080.150.004
4:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-005.mp4
080.150.005
5:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-006.mp4
080.150.006
Ditch Profiles
7:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-007.mp4
080.150.007
3:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-008.mp4
080.150.008
5:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-150-009.mp4
080.150.009
Section updated:
5/1/2012
080.160.001
The following exercise steps through the best practices for modeling a divided highway with independent
alignments and profiles.
Introduction
5:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-002.mp4
080.160.002
2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-003.mp4
080.160.003
7:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-004.mp4
080.160.004
6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-005.mp4
080.160.005
3:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-006.mp4
080.160.006
6:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-007.mp4
080.160.007
5:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-008.mp4
080.160.008
10:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-009.mp4
080.160.009
8:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-010.mp4
080.160.010
1:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-011.mp4
080.160.011
4:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-012.mp4
080.160.012
3:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-013.mp4
080.160.013
5:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-014.mp4
080.160.014
8:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-015.mp4
080.160.015
2:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-016.mp4
7/3/2015
080.160.017
5:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-018.mp4
080.160.018
1:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-019.mp4
080.160.019
5:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-020.mp4
080.160.020
4:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-021.mp4
080.160.021
5:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-022.mp4
080.160.022
8:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-023.mp4
080.160.023
2:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-024.mp4
080.160.024
4:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-025.mp4
080.160.025
2:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-026.mp4
080.160.026
5:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-027.mp4
080.160.027
4:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-160-028.mp4
080.160.028
Section updated:
12/9/2014
080.170.001
Summary: This exercise demonstrates how corridor slopes can be controlled using superelevation. This workflow
enables the control of daylighting slopes without breaking the proposed corridor into separate pieces. An offset
alignment is created for each side of the roadway that requires transition controls. Superelevation data is assigned
to the alignments to control the slopes. A setup corridor is created with generic links that follow the superelevation.
These links are used to create setup surfaces for each of the slopes that need control. The proposed roadway
corridor contains LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies that follow the setup surfaces. GenCF, then parameter
references the slope of the LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies for its slope.
Prerequisites: Offset Alignments, Superimposed Profiles, Superelevation Tabular Editor, Setup Corridors,
Assembly Parameter References
080-170-001 Create Offset Alignments and Superimposed Profiles
Create Offset Alignments
Create an offset alignment of the roadway baseline. The offset should be small, say 0.01. Do this for each
side of the roadway. Example: SlopeControl-L and SlopeControl-R
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
5:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-002.mp4
080.170.002
Superelevation
Expand offset alignments in the Toolspace-Prospector. Right click on the alignment and select Edit
Superelevation. In the Superelevation Curve Manager, click the Tabular Editor button. Close the
Superelevation Curve Manager.
Click the "Plus" button in the tabular editor window. Type in the beginning station of the project. This
exercise uses GenCF for daylighting. Type in the dominate slope for slopes that need additional control. In
this example, we will control the Connecting Link Slope and the Final Link Slope. We will use the Inside Lane
superelevation to control the connecting link slope and the Outside Lane superelevation to control the final link
slope.
Note: If the alignment does not have any curves, the "Plus" button will not be available. Stations can still
be added manually by right clicking in the Superelevation Tabular Editor window.
Click the "Plus" button in the tabular editor window to add another station. Type in the ending station of the
project. Repeat the previous step of typing in the dominant slopes.
Repeat these steps for the opposite side offset alignment.
8:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-003.mp4
080.170.003
5:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-004.mp4
080.170.004
7/3/2015
Notice the construction of the assembly. The assembly consists of four LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies
(two on each side). These subassemblies target the setup surfaces created earlier as indicated by their
names. The assembly also includes the left a right lanes to start with to assure the LinkOffsetOnSurface
subassemblies are assigned to the proper groups.
Finish creating the proposed roadway assembly by adding additional lanes, shoulders, curb and gutter as
needed. Add GenCF on each side to complete the assembly.
In the assembly properties Construction tab, select one of the GenCF subassemblies. Under the Input
Values, check the Use Parameter Reference button for the following:
Connecting Link Slope = Set to TARGET-ConnectingLink Surf
Steep Rate Cut Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Flat Rate Cut Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Steep Rate Fill Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
Flat Rate Fill Slope = Set to TARGET-FinalLink Surf
4:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-005.mp4
080.170.005
7:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-006.mp4
080.170.006
3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-170-007.mp4
080.170.007
Recap
Since the centerline alignment superelevation is already used to control lane and shoulder slope, we made
two offset alignments that contain superelevation data used to control our GenCF slopes. Specifically, in this
example, we use them to control the connecting link and final link slopes. These are the most common slopes
that require variation.
A setup corridor was created that that uses the two offset alignments as base lines. The setup corridor
results in two setup-surfaces. One surface represents the connecting link slopes and the other surface
represents the final link slopes. These slopes vary based on the superelevation entries for the offset
alignments.
Finally, we created our proposed roadway corridor. The assembly for this corridor is like any other roadway
corridor. The difference is the addition of four LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies. These subassemblies
follow the slopes created by the setup corridor surface. GenCF then parameter references the
LinkOffsetOnSurface subassemblies.
Section updated:
4/13/2015
080.180.001
Create Assembly
Summary: This exercise demonstrates how corridor slopes can be controlled using profiles. This workflow
enables the control of daylighting slopes without breaking the proposed corridor into separate pieces. The
elevation data that makes up the profile definition is used to define slope values. A profile is created to represent
the slope of any link in the corridor that varies. The elevation of the profile is equal to the inverse of the desired
slope value.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-002.mp4
080.180.002
5:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-003.mp4
7/3/2015
080.180.003
080.180.004
3:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-180-005.mp4
080.180.005
080.180.006
080.180.007
Section updated:
4/13/2015
Prerequisite
Have a working knowledge of how to develop baseline alignments, offset alignments, design profiles, assemblies,
corridors with horizontal targets and vertical targets, corridor surfaces, and refinement surfaces within a WisDOT
project structure. .
Workflow
The purpose of this workflow is to create a system of setup corridors which is used to develop the profiles within a
roundabout intersection. The workflow results in profiles for all curbs within the intersection which are used to
control elevation in the design corridor. Roundabout horizontal geometry development is not taught in this training,
this training focuses on development of vertical design, and final modeling of a roundabout intersection.
Objective
In this training session the instructor will demonstrate a roundabout modeling dataset that uses a system of setup
corridors to more easily synchronize the profiles for all curbs within a roundabout intersection. The project data the
instructor uses in the videos is available for download.
3:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-001.mp4
080.190.001
Introduction
Advanced Civil 3D workflow training
Beginner Roadway Design track is a prerequisite
Workflow concept, not a demonstration
Data available
Roundabout horizontal geometry is established
No vertical geometry yet
Alignments on all curb flange lines
Workflow primary purpose profile development on all curbs
3:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-002.mp4
080.190.002
2:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-003.mp4
080.190.003
6:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-004.mp4
080.190.004
6:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-005.mp4
080.190.005
3:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-006.mp4
080.190.006
6:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-007.mp4
080.190.007
7/3/2015
7:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-008.mp4
080.190.008
6:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-009.mp4
080.190.009
5:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-010.mp4
080.190.010
4:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-011.mp4
080.190.011
An alternate explanation of how elevation control from setup corridors influence the design corridors
8:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-012.mp4
080.190.012
2:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-190-013.mp4
080.190.013
Section updated:
6/17/2015
080.200.001
1:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-002.mp4
080.200.002
3:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-003.mp4
080.200.003
7/3/2015
but may not be a best practice for a specific project, for specific edgeline objects.
This geometry has been built into parametric blocks for use at WisDOT. There are six of them that model the
following situations:
Left side, tangent section
Left side, left hand curve
Left side, right hand curve
Right side, tangent section
Right side, left hand curve
Right side, right hand curve
The blocks have the following characteristics:
All blocks have an insertion point at the face of beam guard at Post 9.
Left and right side are based on the location of the baseline. For example, if there was a BG EAT on the
inside of a divided highway, it would be considered left side in the cardinal direction.
Proper layer assignment and line display is set by object within the block. Left and right side designations to
certain layers have been added to make corridor targeting easier.
All blocks have been built with Post 1 being the first post that is encountered in the cardinal direction. This
means that blocks may need to be mirrored to locate properly. Left and right side blocks should always be
located on the correct side of the baseline.
All geometry is stored in polylines except for the grading lines. These lines could not be stored as polylines
and made parametric. They are line objects.
The blocks have the following parameters:
Distance from paved shoulder to total shoulder
Curved blocks have a radius of total shoulder
The taper of the paved shoulder from normal width to total width is 10:1
4:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-004.mp4
080.200.004
5:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-005.mp4
080.200.005
Repeat as necessary.
Blocks added with Post 9 being first on stationing need to be mirrored.
Radius for right side curve total shoulder = 2882.784'
7/3/2015
3:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-006.mp4
080.200.006
3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-007.mp4
080.200.007
3:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-008.mp4
080.200.008
4:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-009.mp4
080.200.009
5:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-010.mp4
080.200.010
7/3/2015
080.200.011
5:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-012.mp4
080.200.012
7/3/2015
4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-013.mp4
080.200.013
Use conditional subassemblies to automate the corridor modeling through the beam guard areas. There
are left and right assemblies for 2 lane full reconstruction and shoulder only BG EATs that can be found
on the WisDOT Assemblies palette. These assemblies and their subs can be used as building blocks for
custom assemblies if project conditions are different.
Key attributes of these assemblies:
All assemblies use profiles for key slope values that need to vary along the corridor. The WisDOT
sub ProfileToParameterRef is used for this purpose. WARNING: If a different Autodesk or WisDOT
profile targeting sub is used, it will likely display in cross section output and cause section views to
be extremely large. All of the values of the profile will be less than 1.0. This essentially means using
other subs will cause section views to be as tall as the elevation of the project.
All assemblies use ShldBreakFslp for the shoulder. This sub allows the shoulder to have the 10:1 slope
between the 4% top and the shoulder foreslope which varies between 4:1 and 2.5:1. One key item to
understand about ShldBreakFslp is that it is built with the break occurring outside the total shoulder
width.
7/3/2015
All assemblies use CFGen. Values for CFGen should always be verified before usage. Override
Ditch Bottom is by default set to "Profile". This is good if a ditch profile has been established.
Change this value to "No" if there is no ditch profile. Clear zone and rotation point values need to be
set correctly for the sub to work correctly for a project.
The Rehab No Lane assemblies also use the ShldBreakFslp sub, but then add a surface targeting
sub to get the start of Datum and Base layers. Design surfaces are created using these points for
corridor feature lines. Corridor links are not used in WisDOT cross sections and surfaces.
7:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-014.mp4
080.200.014
7/3/2015
080.200.015
Insert and adjust WisDOT BG EAT profile slope control assemblies (cont'd)
Follow steps above for NoLane-Rehab assemblies.
6:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-016.mp4
080.200.016
6:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-017.mp4
080.200.017
The PVI stations and slopes entered here will vary from project to project, but these are the key
minimum locations that are needed:
Shoulder Break Slope
Post 9 = Steep Slope
Post 5 = Clear Zone Slope
Connecting Link Slope
Steep Section Behind Beam Guard = Steep Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone = Clear Zone Slope
Grading Link Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ Clear Zone = Steep Slope
Grading Line (EVRP) @ 8 o/s from SGSP = Clear Zone Slope (This location is
determined in a later step. Add this station to the profile definition at the end of the
workflow.)
Final Link Slope
Vary as need per project
Add the key transition points above to each appropriate profile.
Change the view configuration to have one Top view over the BG EAT and one view on
the profile view being edited.
Use the transparent command Profile Station from Plan with the Profile Geometry Editor to snap to key
transition points.
9:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-018.mp4
7/3/2015
080.200.018
** TIP ** This exercise leaves the assemblies as left and right and builds the corridor accordingly. There
are other ways to structure assemblies and corridors that may be better suited to a specific project.
** TIP ** Civil 3D does not allow overlapping stations on the same baseline. To use the same alignment
for overlapping left and right side assemblies, create 2 baselines with the same alignment and profile
definition: BL-25-R, BL-25-L
Create the roadway corridor 25-BG. The beam guard corridor region should extend to the end(s)
of the 15:1 taper(s). All the subassembly targets in the BG EAT assemblies are named so target
mapping is apparent.
Once target mapping is completed, build the corridor.
5:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-019.mp4
080.200.019
7:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-020.mp4
080.200.020
5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-021.mp4
080.200.021
** TIP ** If the same assembly is going to be used in multiple regions, all targets can be assigned at
once. Then copy the region by:
Click on the corridor in Modelspace to select it and right-click.
Click "Modify Region" "Copy Regions" to copy a region with targets intact. Regions can also be
copied to different baselines.
7/3/2015
7:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-022.mp4
080.200.022
3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-023.mp4
080.200.023
4:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-024.mp4
080.200.024
4:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-025.mp4
080.200.025
7/3/2015
080.200.026
3:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/080/080-200-027.mp4
080.200.027
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
Intersection Overview
The intersection tool is for:
Laying out the horizontal geometry of the corridor
Creating the vertical geometry based on the horizontal layout
Creating the assembly portion of the corridor
The result of the Intersection tool:
A complex corridor with multiple baseline alignments, regions and targets for width and profiles.
The corridor from an intersection is the same as any you create manually. It is just done more quickly,
and the computations of slopes and targets are done for you
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
9:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-020-001.mp4
090.020.001
Intersection Wizard
The Intersection tool is located in the Home tab > Create Design panel > Intersection
You must identify the point of intersection between the two alignments
You will need to identify which alignment is considered primary
General tab of the wizard
Intersection corridor type, all crowns or primary maintained
Geometry Details Tab
Offset Parameters
Creates offset distance alignments or targets existing
For primary and secondary roadways
Curb Return Parameters
Creates offset distance alignments around curb returns
Provides lane widening for incoming and outgoing for each quadrant of intersection
Lane Slope Parameters
Provides profile elevations at offset alignment location with slope calculated, or targets an existing
profile
Curb Return Profile Parameters
Calculates the elevation tie-in points around the curb return alignment
Corridor Regions tab
Can add corridor definition to new corridor or to an existing corridor
Assign a surface for daylight targets
Assembly assignments for the different design needs for the corridor through the intersection
These assignments provide schematics of typical assemblies that are appropriate
Can save the assembly assignments in an Assembly Set for import into other future projects
Warning about locked profile
Due to data shortcuts
Just select Continue to Use These Profiles
21:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-020-002.mp4
090.020.002
Intersections.dwg
Example discussion
Section updated:
10/1/2012
23:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-030-001.mp4
090.030.001
Intersection Editing.dwg
Editing Intersections
Intersections create corridor objects which can be edited like any corridor (see videos on Corridor creation and
editing)
Corridor can be manually/graphically adjusted/edited
The settings chosen for the intersection during creation can also be edited
Be Aware! Manual edits will be lost if the intersection is edited and rebuilt
Editing in the Corridor Properties
Parameters tab
Often useful for changing target assignments
Changing frequency
Other indirect Corridor edits
Changing assembly parameters
Changing horizontal alignment geometry
Changing vertical profile geometry
Graphic Editing
Limited to provided grip points
Each region has arrow and diamond grips at its ends
Diamonds shift both regions together
Arrows shift only one region can create gaps
Can shift ends of intersection long corridor
Can snap to the next region or corridor
Direct Intersection Editing
Select the Intersection symbol
Green Context Ribbon > Modify panel
Edit Offsets
Edit Curb Returns
Side Road Profile *
Lane Slopes
Curb Return Profiles
Recreate Corridor Regions *
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Modify Tools
Edit Offsets/Curb Returns/Lane Slopes/Curb Return Profiles
Same dialogs as when creating the intersection
No OK/Apply changes are immediate
Selecting fields/names highlight the offset in design
Schematic at bottom to help identify what the selected field needs
Side Road Profile
Controls the automated secondary profile control
If the primary profile is adjusted the secondary should lock to it and adjust as well.
Data shortcut profile data does NOT adjust (the messages we have received)
These are the settings for that adjustment if not using data shortcuts
Recreate Corridor Regions
Same as last page of Intersection Wizard
Create new or add to exiting corridor
Daylight surface
Assemblies/assembly set
Previous changes will be lost
Section updated:
10/1/2012
4:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-040-001.mp4
090.040.001
Intersection object combines selected objects with input parameters to create the geometrics and corridor for an
intersection
The Intersection Wizard guides the user through the process of creating an Intersection
Inputs for the Intersection Wizard
Primary Road and Profile
Secondary Road and Profile
Note if the Intersection is to be used to control the Secondary Road profile within the Intersection the
Secondary Road Profile must be present in the current Drawing File (it cannot be brought into the file as a
Reference to a Data Shortcut)
Intersection type
Primary Road crown maintained
All Crowns maintained
Offsets for Lane/Pavement Edge on Main and Secondary Roads
Slope Parameters for Lane/Pavement Edge on Main Road and Secondary Road
Intersection Quadrant inputs
Curb Return parameters
Type
Radius
Transition and Widening details at Incoming Lane
Transition and Widening at Outgoing Lane
Radii
Secondary Road Profile Rules
Main Road Profile can Control the Secondary Road Profile at the Intersection
Lane Slopes
Cross Fall from Centerline for Main and Secondary Roads
Curb Return Profile parameters
Corridor (Create, append to, or do not build Corridor)
Target Surface
Assembly set
OR Select Assemblies
By Region
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
090.040.002
7:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-040-003.mp4
090.040.003
7/3/2015
Made up of Alignments, Profiles and Corridor(s). All of these objects can be shared in one way or another. The
Intersection Object itself cannot be shared.
Special note for Corridors
For anyone who has access to the Civil 3D Project ID folder, Corridors are shared using Xreferences.
Only allows the ability to create Sample Lines, Sections, Section Views and Materials Quantities
Cross Project Object interaction with Corridors is available by creating Alignments, Profiles, and Surfaces from
the Corridor and sharing as Data Shortcuts
WisDOT workflow addresses this issue.
Corridors are unique and can only be shared with outside organizations if they use Civil 3D that accepts the current
version of the DWG file
Objects derived from Corridors can be shared with outside organizations using LandXML or possibly other custom
formats within Civil 3D Reports or Subscription Advantage Pack
Intersections Need to Know!!!
The Intersection object is the glue that holds the Intersection parent objects, Intersection inputs and the Intersection
child objects together. This link can be broken in many ways. For example, you manually edit a Curb Return
Alignment that was Created using the Intersection Wizard. The inputs used to create the Alignment are no longer
valid. If you go back and edit the Intersection inputs to update that same Curb Return Alignment the manual edits
are no longer valid. This is one example of many. It is very important to understand how to edit an Intersection.
WisDOT workflow places the Secondary Road Alignment and Profile in the Corridor DWG file. This is done do the
Intersection object can adjust the Secondary Road Profile to match the Main Road Profile. This cannot be done if
the Secondary Road Profile is Data Referenced into the Corridor (Intersection) DWG file. It is probably easier to
have Civil 3D maintain the relationship between the two profiles than relying on us to go back and adjust them to
match if we make changes.
The Intersection wizard/object is incredibly powerful, but remember it is a start. We will most likely need to modify
the child objects after the Intersection has been created. Our workflow outlines methods to do this. More
specifically, the workflow outlines the procedures to
Add Base Course Shoulder Geometry
Check Curb Return Profiles
Add Adjusted Curb Return Profiles
Add Geometry to better represent Curb Return Alignment Tapers on the Side Road
Edit the Corridor
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
support.cae@dot.wi.gov
Intersections Custom content
Talk through the STH25 Intersection and discuss
Show Diagram of Intersection, Baselines and Regions
Quick demo on Intersection
Edit Intersection Objects
Transitions/Tapers for 4th Ave
Profile View for Curb Returns
Corridor
Targets for CABC shoulder
Targets for New Curb Return Profiles
Null Assembly through Intersection along 4th Ave
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
090.050.001
1:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-002.mp4
090.050.002
2:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-003.mp4
090.050.003
1:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-004.mp4
090.050.004
0:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-005.mp4
090.050.005
2:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-050-006.mp4
090.050.006
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
090.060.001
1:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-002.mp4
090.060.002
5:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-003.mp4
090.060.003
5:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-004.mp4
090.060.004
4:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-005.mp4
090.060.005
2:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-006.mp4
090.060.006
3:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-007.mp4
090.060.007
8:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-008.mp4
090.060.008
2:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-009.mp4
090.060.009
3:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-010.mp4
090.060.010
6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-011.mp4
090.060.011
Review corridor
4:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-060-012.mp4
090.060.012
Review exercise
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
090.070.001
2:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-002.mp4
090.070.002
5:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-003.mp4
090.070.003
10:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-004.mp4
090.070.004
9:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-005.mp4
090.070.005
6:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-006.mp4
090.070.006
4:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-007.mp4
090.070.007
10:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-008.mp4
090.070.008
7:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-009.mp4
090.070.009
6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-010.mp4
090.070.010
6:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-011.mp4
090.070.011
8:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-012.mp4
090.070.012
3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-013.mp4
090.070.013
7:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-014.mp4
090.070.014
8:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-015.mp4
090.070.015
4:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-016.mp4
090.070.016
8:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-017.mp4
090.070.017
5:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-018.mp4
090.070.018
5:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-019.mp4
090.070.019
8:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-070-020.mp4
090.070.020
Summary
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-001.mp4
090.080.001
This exercise is optional. It completes the geometry fixes to the entire intersection.
Introduction
5:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-002.mp4
090.080.002
8:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-003.mp4
090.080.003
9:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-004.mp4
090.080.004
6:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-005.mp4
090.080.005
4:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-006.mp4
090.080.006
6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-007.mp4
090.080.007
5:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-008.mp4
090.080.008
5:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-009.mp4
090.080.009
4:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-010.mp4
090.080.010
4:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-011.mp4
090.080.011
3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-012.mp4
090.080.012
7:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-013.mp4
090.080.013
4:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-014.mp4
090.080.014
090.080.015
6:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-016.mp4
090.080.016
6:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-017.mp4
090.080.017
7:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-018.mp4
090.080.018
2:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-080-019.mp4
090.080.019
Review exercise.
Section updated:
7/1/2010
090.090.001
2:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-002.mp4
090.090.002
2:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-003.mp4
090.090.003
7:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-004.mp4
090.090.004
6:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-005.mp4
090.090.005
5:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-006.mp4
090.090.006
3:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-007.mp4
090.090.007
5:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-008.mp4
090.090.008
7:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-009.mp4
090.090.009
4:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-010.mp4
090.090.010
8:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-011.mp4
090.090.011
8:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-090-012.mp4
090.090.012
7/3/2015
090.090.013
Section updated:
7/1/2010
Section updated:
4/13/2015
090.100.001
1:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-002.mp4
090.100.002
4:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-003.mp4
090.100.003
3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-004.mp4
090.100.004
4:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-005.mp4
090.100.005
7:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-006.mp4
090.100.006
6:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-007.mp4
090.100.007
1:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-008.mp4
090.100.008
3:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-009.mp4
090.100.009
5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-010.mp4
090.100.010
7:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-011.mp4
090.100.011
6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-012.mp4
090.100.012
3:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-013.mp4
090.100.013
6:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-100-014.mp4
090.100.014
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-exercise-files.zip 090-110-000-Int-Obj-Rvw.dwg
It is not necessary to use either the Offset and curb returns or the Corridor Regions options to create an
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Intersection object. For the WisDOT workflow we will keep these options unchecked in the Create Intersection
Dialog.
The intersecting alignments are displayed on the top of the Geometry Details section of the Create
Intersection tool.
Here you determine the priority to how profile locking occurs for the profiles associated with the
intersection.
7/3/2015
You can change the priority of an alignment by selecting an alignment in this list and using the arrows to
the right.
By changing the alignment priority the associated profiles will change, so it is important to note that the
profile associated with the secondary alignment must always be developed in the drawing where the
intersection is being created, and it must be a design profile.
The profile associated with the primary alignment can be either a surface or design profile and may be a
data reference.
7/3/2015
090.110.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-001-proj-dataset.zip
Horizontal Geometry Development in the Corridor drawing
Key Concept: Create all specific intersection geometry (curb returns, turn lanes and tapers) as alignments in
the corridor drawing where the intersection is being designed. Typical roadway offsets like ETW, EPS and
EGS have been developed as offset alignments in the AliProf dwg(s) and data shortcuts create for them in the
project
1. Open the drawing named AliProf-25.dwg
2. Review the alignment and profile objects in this drawing.
The primary and secondary stationed alignments have been created.
A proposed profile for just the primary road stationed alignment has been created.
All of the horizontal roadway geometry as offset alignments including lane edges, pavement edges, paved
shoulder, and aggregate shoulder have been created from both baseline alignments
1. Notice a design profile for the side streets are not created in this aliprof drawing.
2. Data shortcuts of all the alignments and profiles in this drawing are created.
Review: Notice the alignments in Aliprof-25.dwg represent major project edge lines of geometry outside the
intersection areas. These alignments are extended along the length of the project and will be masked when
crossing through intersections. The purpose for this masking is to facilitate these alignments to be used as part of
project line work drawings such as Pavt.dwg, which then can then be shared through XREFs. For further
information refer to methods for developing pavement drawings.
4:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-002.mp4
090.110.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-002.zip
Horizontal Geometry Development - Corridor drawing
Key Concept: Create the alignments for specific intersection geometry (curb returns, turn lanes and
tapers) in the corridor drawing where the intersection is being designed.
Best Practice: Do not create Data Shortcuts for any surface sampled profiles anywhere in the
project. This creates extra data shortcut clutter and creates a static profile that requires manual
synchronizing. If needed create data shortcuts of the surfaces, and then create the surface profile in
the drawing where needed.
1. Save a drawing from the wisdot14.dwt named Crdr-25-4.dwg
2. In this drawing create Data references for the following alignments and profiles:
Primary Road stationed alignment: 25 Proposed Profile: 25-Prop
Offset alignments: 25-L-ETW 25-R-ETW
25-L-EPS 25-R-EPS
25-L-EGS 25-R-EGS
Side Road stationed alignment: 4th
Offset alignments: 4th-L-ETW 4th-R-ETW
4th-L-EGS 4th-R-EGS
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
3. Create the turn lane, taper and curb return alignments following the geometry guidelines described in
the following steps. This exercise shows the alignments being created from objects, but these
could be developing using the alignment tools as well. This is a users preference and accuracy
of the geometry is the required outcome.
4. Lines, arcs, and/or polylines can be used to create the turn lane, taper and curb return geometry.
When creating the geometry, make sure the alignments overlap beyond where they first become
coincidental to the offset alignments. Later in the workflow, intersection objects will be used to lock
down the curb return profiles. These overlaps are necessary for the intersection objects to work
properly.
Create the turn lane/taper alignments to extend through the intersection and connect to the like
geometry on the other side.
5. Make sure the curb return alignments are independent. In other words, they should not be a part of
any other alignment. This is different from the intersection wizard. The intersection wizard would
combine the curb return alignments with any approaching turn lanes and/or tapers.
6. If Autocad entities were used to create the geometry, they can be converted to alignments using the
Alignments from Objects tool.
Home>Create Design>Alignment>Create Alignment from Object - Select the polylines near the
end to be the start.
The TrnLn, ETW, and EGS alignments should run in the same direction as the stationed road
alignment.
All the curb return alignments should run in the direction of travel. This will ensure we only need to
create one set of assemblies for all curb returns.
7/3/2015
Create the following alignments as Centerline type with appropriate RDWY styles:
Int-25-L-TrnLn Int-25-R-TrnLn
Int-25-L-EGS Int-25-R-EGS
Int-4th-L-TrnLn Int-4th-R-TrnLn
Int-4th-L-EGS Int-4th-R-EGS
Int-25-4th-NW-CR Int-25-4th-NE-CR
Int-25-4th-SW-CR Int-25-4th-SE-CR
Save the drawing.
4:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-003.mp4
090.110.003
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-003.zip
Vertical Geometry Development Corridor drawing
Key Concept: Data Reference a Lane Edge Setup Surface. This surface can be used to create surface profiles
to use as targets by assemblies in the design corridor, and assign profile relationships with the intersection
object.
The dataset pre-setup:
Alignments and profile created in \\12342014\Design\AliProfs\Aliprof-25.dwg have been
added as Data Shortcuts to project 12342014. The drawing has the following
alignments and profiles:
Primary Road stationed alignment: 25
Proposed Profile: 25-Prop
Offset alignments: 25-L-ETW 25-R-ETW
25-L-EPS 25-R-EGS
25-L-EGS 25-R-EPS
Side Road stationed alignment: 4th
Offset alignments: 4th-L-ETW 4th-R-ETW
4th-L-EGS 4th-R-EGS
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
090.110.004
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-004.zip
Intersection Objects to Synchronize Vertical Geometry - Secondary road profiles
1. In this section we will design the secondary road profile ( 4th ) using intersection objects to get the
PVI elevations from the main road baseline profile and ETW profiles created in the previous exercise
2. With Crdr-25-4th.dwg open go to Home Tab>Design Panel>Intersection - Create Intersection.
Select the intersection of the main road and the side road center line alignments. (25 and 4th)
When prompted at the command line, Select the 25 alignment as the primary alignment.
Name the intersection Int-25-4
Set the Intersection marker style to Standard and the Intersection label style to _No Display
Go to the Geometry Details page
Uncheck the Offset and curb return profile check box
Uncheck the Create curb return alignments check box
Uncheck the Create or specify offset alignments check box
Verify the main road alignment 25 is shown in Priority row 1
Verify the 25 profile is set to 25-Prop
Verify the side road 4th alignment is shown in the Priority row 2 and select 4th-Prop as the profile.
7/3/2015
7/3/2015
Click OK.
You will see the following message indicating that the 25-L-ETW will effectively be ignored since it
is coincident to the Int-25-L-TrLn profile. Choose the option to Create intersection with dynamic
profiles.
5. Follow the steps above to complete the intersection object for the 25-R-ETW. The 4th-Prop should
now have three VPI depicting the cross slopes across 25 from left ETW to crown to right ETW.
4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-005.mp4
090.110.005
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-005.zip
Lane Edge Setup Surface - Side Roads
Follow the concepts shown in 070.025 Lane Edge Setup Surface from corridor object to create a
ETW setup surface for the 4th Avenue side road.
Create Surface profiles for the Int-4th-L-TrnLn and Int-4th-R-TrnLn using the corridor setup surface.
9:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-006.mp4
090.110.006
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-006.zip
Curb Return Setup
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Create an Exist surface profile and a profile view for each of the curb return alignments.
Ensure the profile view extends beyond the beginning and end of the curb return alignment.
Rename the surface profiles if desired.
For each curb return alignment Create a design profile in the curb return profile view.
Snap to the beginning of the profile view near the existing surface and then set the end of the design profile
near the existing surface at the end of the profile view. This step ensures there is a design profile developed
for the intersection object to use to establish a VPI that will match the edge of turn lane profile
Insert the Setup-Curb-Prof assembly from the WisDOT Assemblies palette.
The assembly includes three slope possibilities derived from the LinkWidthandSlope subassembly. The three
slopes represent the maximum (MAX), minimum (MIN), and normal (NORM) cross slopes in the intersections. The
default minimum slope is 1%. The default maximum slope is 4%. The default normal slope is 2%. These slopes
can be modified to match project-specific conditions. Additional slopes can be added using the LinkWidthandSlope
subassembly if desired (superelevation conditions for example). The subassemblies are named so targeting is
easier.
Create a new Corridor and name it CurbReturn Setup
Parameters tab: Use the Curb Setup-Curb-Prof assembly in the corridor. Add a baseline for each of the
curb return alignments. Use the curb alignments' existing surface profile since a proposed profile has not been
created yet.
Parameters tab: Set the frequency to 2 feet. Change Profile Geometry Points to No. Add an additional
frequency at the intersection of the side road alignment and mainline ETW (edge of travelway) alignment.
Width of Offset Targets, for each curb return baseline region
Set the Target for Subassembly ETW Ali_Prof and Sideroad Ali_Prof to the appropriate TrnLn or ETW
alignment and side road centerline alignment. Set to Target to Nearest Offset.
Set the Target for Subassembly Max Slope TARGET Curb Return Ali to the Curb Return alignment
Slope or Elevation Targets, for each curb return baseline region
Set the Target for Subassembly ETW Ali_Prof and Sideroad Ali_Prof to the appropriate TrnLn or ETW
setup profile and the side road proposed profile. Set to Target to Nearest Offset.
Surfaces tab: Create a new surface called Curb Return-Setup-MAX. Add the MAX link to its definition. Set
the style to No Display. Check the Add as Breakline box.
Surfaces tab: Create a new surface called Curb Return-Setup-MIN. Add the MIN link to its definition. Set
the style to No Display. Check the Add as Breakline box.
Surfaces tab: Create a new surface called Curb Return-Setup-NORM. Add the NORM link to its definition.
Set the style to No Display. Check the Add as Breakline box.
Click Ok to build the setup corridor and surface.
The corridor code set style, the corridor object style and the Feature Line Styles can now be set to No Display.
Home Tab - Design Panel - Profile - Create Surface Profile. Select a curb return alignment. Select the Curb
Return Setup-MAX, Curb Return Setup - MIN, and Curb Return Setup - NORM surfaces. Click Add. Change the
surface profile style to RDWY Lane Edge.
Repeat the previous step for all curb return alignments.
The curb return profile extension on the outsides of the locked PVIs can be adjusted for visual clarity. Best practice
is to not delete these ends. This is because the intersection object is often referencing exactly at that PVI and if
horizontal geometry changes are made that cause the intersection object to reference the profile beyond the
existing PVI it will have no profile to reference. Remember the intersection object is not locking the VPI to the
alignment PC. The profile will need to be stretch and in some cases a new intersection object created.
If you wish to delete profile entities select the profile and go to the Geometry Editor, and use the Delete entity
button.
3:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-007.mp4
090.110.007
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-007.zip
Intersection Objects to Synchronize Vertical Geometry - Curb Returns
Open Corridor drawing Crdr-25-4th.dwg.
Home, Create Deign, Intersections, Create Intersection.
Select the intersection at each end of each curb return. Select the TrnLn alignment as the main road
alignment when prompted
General: Name the Intersections according to the quadrant they are in and the closes centerline, either the
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
secondary or primary road. (i.e. Int-NE-4 and Int-NE-25 for intersections at both ends of the curb return in the
NE quadrant)
Geometry Details: Make sure all check boxes are un-checked.
Verify the alignment priority and the Profile for each alignment is correct.
Press Create Intersection.
Repeat the previous steps for each curb return. Notice the PVIs (lock symbols) that get added to the curb
return profile as the intersections are created.
Using the Min, Normal and Max profiles created in the last step as a guide to create additional PVIs on the curb
return profiles as necessary.
4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-008.mp4
090.110.008
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-008.zip
Add Intersection Geometry Alignments to Data Shortcuts
Open the Crdr-25-4th.dwg, ensure that masks have been added to all the intersection alignments.
Each alignment that overlaps another alignment or extends through the intersection will require adding a
mask to the alignment in these locations if the alignments are to be used for production drawings.
Each alignment should be in the Centerline Alignments or Miscellaneous Alignments group in the Prospector.
Setting the alignment type to Centerline Alignments will allow you to leverage using superelevation options
without having to make an alignment type change later.
To change the alignment type of any of the alignments so there are Centerline alignments, select the
alignment Properties and change the Type on the Information tab.
Alignments and profiles created in \\12342014\Design\Corridors\Crdr-25-4th.dwg can now be added as Data
Shortcuts.
Save the drawing and add the following alignments and profiles as Data Shortcuts;
Secondary Design Profiles
4th-Prop
Intersection Geometry alignments Design Profiles
Int-25-L-TrnLn
Int-25-R-TrnLn
Int-25-L-EGS
Int-25-R-EGS
Int-4-L-TrnLn
Int-4-R-TrnLn
Int-4-L-EGS
Int-4-R-EGS
Int-25-4th-NW-CR Int-25-4th-NW-CR-Prop
Int-25-4th-NE-CR Int-25-4th-NE-CR-Prop
Int-25-4th-SW-CR Int-25-4th-SW-CR-Prop
Int-25-4th-SE-CR Int-25-4th-SE-CR-Prop
The design profiles developed for the turn lane alignments do not need to be added as Data Shortcuts as
they are only consumed in this drawing by the intersection object and will not be used in another corridor or
other type drawing.
These alignments can be used to create a Pavt-Ultimate.dwg by use of data references and assuring adequate
alignment mask have been developed.
Notice that none of the surface profiles are added to the Data Shortcuts. Adding surface or sampled profiles is
unnecessary since the surfaces and the alignments that developed the surface profiles in this drawing are available
as data references to use in other drawings.
3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/090/090-110-009.mp4
090.110.009
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/090/090-110-009.zip
1. Fix Broken Intersection Object
7/3/2015
Added definition to the 4th Avenue Proposed profile. Vertical curves added within pavement warp
area and curb returns.
Added definition to the Curb return profiles.
In this data set notice one of the intersection objects on the SW curb return no longer holds a locked PVI
on the proposed curb return profile.
The Intersection object appears to no longer control vertical connection. This can happen for a variety of
possible reasons, such as the profile or alignment was shortened past the intersection point, the
alignments no longer intersect, to point out a few items to watch for as you are building and manipulating
the alignments and profiles.
Section updated:
6/25/2013
11:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-010-001.mp4
095.010.001
Most vehicles are simplistic, consisting of a simple tractor/trailer configuration with steering at the front axle only.
With sound judgment and guidance from the FDM, these swept paths can be created with relative ease.
More complicated vehicles are appearing statewide. These vehicles include a combination of features or
restrictions that can be difficult to model.
greater than 2 parts (not difficult by itself)
steerable rear axles (either linked or independent)
Independent steerable rear axles are the most difficult because it requires the User, not the
software, to make decisions/judgments about the capability of the vehicle and what is realistic.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Overview
Step 1: Identify the project characteristics What is the design vehicle or vehicles?
Step 2: Gather physical vehicle data dimensions, angle, etc.
Step 3: Document real-world swept paths Survey vehicle maneuvers (Vehicles with more than 1 steering axle)
Step 4: Build the vehicle model Swept path software
Step 5: Trace the real-world swept paths Calibrate your model (Vehicles with more than 1 steering axle)
Step 6: Coordinate with the trucking company Get feedback from the experts
Step 7: Make refinements Adjust based on comments
Step 1: Identify the project characteristics
Is it on the OSOW freight network?
The OSOW vehicles listed in the FDM may not be all inclusive. Include freight as a topic for your business
outreach
The project may be the last mile
Is your project en route to a large bridge?
Step 2: Gather physical vehicle data
Body dimensions
Load dimensions/position
Axle spacing
King pin locations
Steering angle(s)
Articulation angle(s)
Ground clearance
Lock to Lock Time
Step 3: Document real-world swept paths (Vehicles with rear steering)
Coordinate with trucking company
Trace the swept path (front and rear tires) through a 90 degree turn
The more of these you do, the more refined the model will be
Survey the painted swept path at the intersection
Observe and document details like rear axle rate of articulation ( steering angle/distanced traveled)
Step 4: Build the vehicle model
Input the vehicle data into the swept path software
Use Methods Development as a resource
Double check your inputs and confirm with trucking company
Step 5: Trace the real-world swept paths (Vehicles with more than 1 steering axle)
Use the survey data as a guide to drive the vehicle through the intersection
This will act as an aid for how to drive other intersections. (Calibration)
Pay close attention to the rate of articulation at the rear.
Step 6: Coordinate with the trucking company
Share your result with the trucking company. Animate the swept path. Ask them questions like:
Does this look like a realistic way to maneuver this intersection?
Are there any features that would make this intersection easier to drive?
Step 7: Make refinements
Use the feedback from the trucking company to refine the swept path
Make adjustments to the intersection geometry
Send an updated animation to the trucking company.
Section updated:
6/25/2013
7/3/2015
In 2007, WisDOT in cooperation with Spancrete performed a study to accurately model beam transport trucks with
swept path software. This training package has been assembled to provide guidance to designers on development
of proper swept paths for the beam transport trucks. Included with this training package are the following files:
149' Beam (Training Vehicle).vcl
This vehicle file can be imported in to AutoTURN and used to practice swept path development.
This is the vehicle that was used in the study and should only be used for training purposes. The
actual design vehicle is located in the WisDOT OSOW library and is called 165' Beam 1.
template.dwg
This drawing contains the actual surveyed path of the 149' Beam truck at two intersections (1 left
turn, and 1 right turn). There are multiple paths from multiple vehicles/drivers shown at both
intersections to represent variability.
16tdq125305_crop.tif, 16tdq125320_crop.tif, 16tdq140320_crop.tif
Cropped USGS aerial imagery to provide background reference
Beam Transporter Training.dwg
This file has the template.dwg and USGS aerial imagery xreferenced into it
This file can be used or copied to practice drawing swept paths.
This file contains two swept paths that have been drawn for the left turn and the right turn to show
what the finished swept paths should looks like.
Import the 149' Beam training vehicle into AutoTURN
-Select Vehicles from the AutoTURN menu.
-At the bottom of the Vehicles dialogue box, choose Import Vehicle.
-Select the 149' Beam (Training Vehicle).vcl file and click Open.
Helpful Hints and information for creating beam transporter swept paths:
-The rear bogie articulation is completely independent of the front steering and is controlled with hydraulics by the
driver. A typical articulation rate for the bogie over a given travel distance is dependent on the anticipated vehicle
speed. A good starting point for design purposes is to articulate the rear bogie a maximum of 4-degrees for every
17 feet of travel entering and exiting the maneuver. This is roughly the distance between the front axle and the first
king pin.
-The vehicle is capable of articulating the bogie as a stop condition. However, this is highly undesirable and is only
done is extreme circumstances. This action places elevated lateral forces on the girder and bogie, especially on
dry pavement.
-When articulating the rear bogie while entering the maneuver, try to get the bogie to follow the path of the tractor
as long as you can. This will method will help provide a smooth transition.
-Avoid articulating the bogie too earlier or too quickly causing it to swing outside of the tractor path.
-The maximum articulation angle between the jeep and tractor is 45-degrees. The maximum articulation angle
between the jeep and the beam is 45-degrees. These angles are preset in the vehicle template. Exceeding these
angles increases the risk of tipping the beam. The maximum articulation of the bogie is 20-degrees and is limited
by its mechanical capability. This is also preset in the vehicle template.
Animate Swept Path
From the AutoTURN menu, click the Run Animation button. The Run Animation button has standard controls for
play speed, stop, pause, and a slider to move to a specific position in the swept path. The animation will display
best if the aerial imagery is turned off. Watch for erratic or unrealistic movements such as swerves.
2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-020-002.mp4
095.020.002
Video Footage
This section contains actual video footage of the beam transport truck's rear bogie and is intended to give the
audience a better idea of how the vehicle works.
13:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-020-003.mp4
095.020.003
Calibration
This is Step 5 from the Accurate Swept Paths for Complex OSOW Vehicle section of this module. Trace the actual
swept path that was surveyed in Step 3 of the Accurate Swept Paths for Complex OSOW Vehicle section of this
module. This section demonstrates how to the Beam Transporter vehicle works by creating a swept path over an
actual surveyed swept path of the vehicle.
Practice drawing swept paths using the 149' Beam training vehicle:
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
095.020.004
Maneuvering a Roundabout
In this exercise, we will practice maneuvering the beam transport vehicle through a single lane roundabout.
Place the swept path on the proper layer. There are layers available in the wisdot templates for swept paths. They
can be located easily by using the RAB layer filter.
RAB_EB_TURN_Left
RAB_EB_TURN_Right
RAB_EB_TURN_Thru
RAB_EB_TURN_U
Remember: The 165' Beam vehicle located in the WisDOT OSOW library is to be used for design.
Create a swept path without applying an override angle to the rear bogie.
In some cases, minor modifications to the roundabout entry, truck apron, and exit can be made to make this
possible. Adding features like a truck apron to roundabout entry, expanding the central island truck apron, and
widening the roundabout exit can sometimes be done to make it easier for the vehicle. Be sure to have features
like these reviewed by a qualified roundabout designer and get WisDOT approval.
Create the swept path using the rear bogie override angle.
The through maneuver on a roundabout is an S-curve. The key is to make the S-curve as flat as possible for this
vehicle. Maneuvering an S-curve requires the bogie to articulate left, then right, and then back left again. While
doing this, it is important not to exceed the 4-degree/17 ft rule for transitioning the bogie angle. Only articulate the
bogie as much as is needed and no more.
Section updated:
6/25/2013
7/3/2015
095.030.001
Setup
Create DST Lowboy DWG File
C3D=>New=>Drawing
Use wisdot10.dwt template to create the new dwg file
Name the drawing DST Lowboy.dwg
Set working folder to c:/WisDOT/Design/c3d
Set Data Shortcuts folder to 44444444
Xref Edglines
External References Manager
Attach Pavt-RAB.dwg file in the Edgelines folder
Use relative path attachment
Data Shortcut Reference Top Roadway Model surface
Found in Data Shortcuts=>Surfaces area of the Prospector
Right-Click on RoadwayModel TOP
=> Create Reference.
View top surface in Final Top Border style
Select surface => right-click => Surface properties
Surface Properties dialog box => Information Tab
095.030.002
2D Swept Path
Select and edit the DST Lowboy 1 vehicle in the WisDOT Library
AutoTURN Pro 3D or AutoTURN => Configure => Vehicles
Select the WisDOT Library
Select the DST Lowboy 1 vehicle
Click the Edit Vehicle button
Apply a point load to the DST Load 1 vehicle
Click the Define 2D Loads button
Use the white arrows to select the jeep portion of the vehicle
Set Load Type to 1 point
Point location will be at the king pin (0.00 ft left/right, 1.33 ft behind)
Click OK three times to return to the drawing
Create 2D swept path
AutoTURN Pro 3D
AutoTURN Pro 3D => 2D SmartPaths => 2D Arc Path
AutoTURN
AutoTURN => Smart Paths => Generate Arc Path
Make copy of swept path and Hide
Copy and Paste Clipboard
Click on the swept path
Clipboard => Copy with Base Point
Select a reference point location
Right Click => Clipboard => Paste
Select the same reference point location
Hide Object
Select the swept path
Right Click => Isolate Objects => Hide Selected Objects
Create Polyline Path for 3D DST Lowboy 2 part vehicle placement
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Configure => Properties
Make sure the Load is check under the Envelope properties, update the swept path is necessary,
click OK
Explode
Explode command => select swept path => Enter
Join
Home => Modify => Join
Select all of the polyline segments representing the jeep king pin (point load) path ents
Select and delete the remaing exploded swept path elements
11:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-003.mp4
095.030.003
3D Swept Path
Place 3D Simulation
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Configure => Vehicles
Select the DST Lowboy 2 part 1 design vehicle from the WisDOT Library
AutoTURN Pro 3D => 3D Terrain => Terrain
Select the RoadModel TOP Surface
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Place 3D => Place Simulation
Select a location near the beginning of the Polyline representing the jeep king pin path
Develop a generalized ground clearance profile
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Clearance Analysis => Vehicle Clearance
Cut a profile along the path of the jeep king pin.
Not representative of the entire vehicle envelope
Only need Ground Clearance checked for this exercise.
Choose desired scale and color scheme
Click Place Report
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
095.030.004
3D Simulation
Create 3D animation
Orbit
Orbit to desire point of view
Surface Properties
Choose a surface style that shows the TIN
View => Views => View Styles
Select the desired view style (Conceptual works well)
Place the vehicle at desired locations or Animate
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Visualize 3D => Place Vehicle
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Visualize 3D => Animate
7:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/095/095-030-005.mp4
095.030.005
Design Changes
Switch Surface
Data shortcut reference the revised design surface
Delete the data shortcut reference from the drawing
Regenerate Simulation
AutoTURN Pro 3D => Edits => Regerate Simulation
Select the path
Select the new terrain (surface)
Recheck Ground Clearance
Punch Through is not dynamic and need to be redone
Typical Problem Areas in Roundabouts
1. Over-tracking at the entry curve/lowboy hitting the curb head
1. Consider Curb and Gutter 4-inch Sloped Type G and a truck apron along the right side
2. Entry and exit rollover
1. Consider flattening the circulatory roadway crown in these areas
2. Avoid steep profiles entering and exiting the roundabout
3. Truck Aprons
1. Consider flattening the truck apron slope
2. See if the vehicle can track more on the circulatory roadway
1. May need to consider 1a.
3. Look at the circulatory roadway profile
1. Keep it as flat/gentle as possible and still maintain drainage
2. Locate the crest away from the area of concern.
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
100.010.001
100.010.002
Corridor-STH25-4thAve-12.dwg
Section editor example
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
2:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/100/100-020-001.mp4
Corridor overrides are created when Edits are made using Corridor Section Editor
Corridor overrides are maintained in the Corridor Object until they are deleted or updated
Corridor Overrides include
Parameter overrides changes to the subassembly inputs
Geometric overrides manual changes to the Corridor Links
Comparison to CAiCE
Corridor Section Editor is similar to View/Edit Xsections
WisDOT Standards
See Corridor Styles
Corridor Section Editor Need to Know!!!
We do not recommend doing Geometric edits to a Corridor. The Overrides are not dynamic with the Corridor
changes
Be sure Corridor Overrides are still valid if the overall Corridor is changed
DO NOT press the X (Exit) button on the upper right hand corner of the graphics window when using the Corridor
Section Editor. Use the Close button on the Editor Tab of the Ribbon.
If you have any questions about WisDOT vBooks, standards, workflows, etc, feel free to contact
support.cae@dot.wi.gov
6:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/100/100-020-002.mp4
100.020.002
Quick demo
Make parameter edit control
Make a geometric edit
Show results
Change corridor and rebuild
Show how edits are still there
Remove edits
Cover what was mentioned in need to know.
Cover what user needs to do if they get their graphics stuck in Corridor Section Editor.
7/3/2015
Section updated:
10/1/2012
110.010.001
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
26:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-020-001.mp4
110.020.001
Section updated:
10/1/2012
24:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-030-001.mp4
110.030.001
7/3/2015
Adjacent Elevation by Reference Allows editing of an adjacent feature lines elevation in relation to the selected
feature line. Options are Elevation difference, Grade or Slope
Grade Extension by Reference Sets elevations by extending the grade of a segment on another feature line
Elevation from Surface Sets vertex points to surface elevations at their location
Intermediate Grade Break creates an elevation point where the feature crosses a surface triangle (entire
feature line)
Raise/Lower Feature Line specifies elevation difference to raise or lower the feature line, or set to a specific
elevation
Section updated:
10/1/2012
20:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-040-001.mp4
110.040.001
7/3/2015
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-050-001.mp4
110.050.001
Civil 3D Gradings
You can use the grading tools to design finished graded surfaces. Gradings are objects that have their own
properties and behavior like other AutoCAD Civil 3D objects. You create a grading by selecting a base line in the
drawing, and then specifying a projection method and target, for example, grade at 3:1 to meet an existing surface.
Save time and effort by predefining such values and saving them as grading criteria.
Subsequent gradings you create will use the current criteria. You can also create named grading styles that
combine specific display properties, such as colors. In addition to using the current criteria, any grading you create
uses the current style. (from Civil 3D Help)
Gradings are stored in a Site remember that Sites maintain Topology between the Gradings. If two
Gradings that overlap are stored in the same Site, the overlaps will be resolved (this is super handy for things
like Gore areas)
Gradings are created from Feature Lines and Grading Criteria. They are stored in a Site under the Grading
Group collection.
Grading Groups
Have Descriptions
Can Automatically create Surfaces (dynamic relationship to the Grading Group)
Use Grading Criteria
Slope to Distance
Slope to Elevation
Slope to Surface
Slope to Elevation Difference
Can contain multiple Feature Lines and Gradings
1:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-050-002.mp4
7/3/2015
3:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/110/110-050-003.mp4
110.050.003
7/3/2015
Lines for Curb Return slope finishing. We have added an example demonstrating creation of Feature Lines and
Gradings that are dynamically linked to the Corridor and the Refined Surfaces.
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
120.010.001
Introduction
Why Roadway Models???
7:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-002.mp4
120.010.002
6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-003.mp4
120.010.003
5:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-004.mp4
120.010.004
6:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-005.mp4
120.010.005
2:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-006.mp4
120.010.006
11:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-007.mp4
120.010.007
4:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-008.mp4
120.010.008
Surface types
Corridor surface - Datum
Roadway model surface - Datum
Corridor surface - Top
Roadway model surface - Top
7:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-009.mp4
4:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-010.mp4
120.010.010
6:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-011.mp4
120.010.011
3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-012.mp4
120.010.012
Handling roadway projects that are difficult to process with limited computer hardware
Divide the project into multiple corridors and merge the resultant surfaces together.
3:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-013.mp4
120.010.013
5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-010-014.mp4
120.010.014
Summary
Why Roadway Models?
Roadway Model Content
Design Data Progression
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
120.020.001
6:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-002.mp4
120.020.002
7:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-003.mp4
120.020.003
6:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-004.mp4
120.020.004
4:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-005.mp4
120.020.005
5:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-006.mp4
120.020.006
7:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-007.mp4
120.020.008
3:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-009.mp4
120.020.009
5:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-010.mp4
120.020.010
5:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-011.mp4
120.020.011
3:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-012.mp4
120.020.012
5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-013.mp4
120.020.013
5:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-014.mp4
120.020.014
5:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-015.mp4
120.020.015
4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-016.mp4
120.020.016
2:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-020-017.mp4
120.020.017
Section updated:
7/1/2010
120.030.001
3:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-002.mp4
120.030.002
5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-003.mp4
120.030.003
2:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-004.mp4
120.030.004
2:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-005.mp4
120.030.005
1:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-006.mp4
120.030.006
5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-007.mp4
7/3/2015
120.030.008
1:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-009.mp4
120.030.009
3:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-010.mp4
120.030.010
1:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-030-011.mp4
120.030.011
Review
Section updated:
7/1/2010
120.040.001
4:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-002.mp4
120.040.002
4:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-003.mp4
120.040.003
6:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-004.mp4
120.040.004
7:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-005.mp4
120.040.005
1:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-006.mp4
120.040.006
3:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-007.mp4
120.040.007
7:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-008.mp4
120.040.008
7:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-009.mp4
120.040.009
5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-010.mp4
120.040.010
7:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-011.mp4
120.040.011
8:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-012.mp4
120.040.012
9:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-013.mp4
7/3/2015
120.040.014
5:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-015.mp4
120.040.015
3:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-016.mp4
120.040.016
1:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-017.mp4
120.040.017
8:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-018.mp4
120.040.018
1:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-019.mp4
120.040.019
6:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-020.mp4
120.040.020
5:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-040-021.mp4
120.040.021
Section updated:
7/1/2010
120.050.001
4:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-002.mp4
120.050.002
7:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-003.mp4
120.050.003
4:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-004.mp4
120.050.004
3:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-005.mp4
120.050.005
3:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-006.mp4
120.050.006
1:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-050-007.mp4
120.050.007
Review
Section updated:
12/1/2010
7/3/2015
8:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-060-001.mp4
120.060.001
7:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-060-002.mp4
120.060.002
Section updated:
3/1/2013
120.070.001
5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-002.mp4
120.070.002
14:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-003.mp4
120.070.003
11:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-004.mp4
120.070.004
7/3/2015
Refinement-Top with Exist surface using the Elevations from Surface command. Make sure it is included in
the site created for this driveway.
Convert the driveway centerline polyline into a feature line. Name the feature line appropriately (For
example: 380+75 LT CL) Do not assign the feature line a style. The feature line will adopt its elevations from
the edge of shoulder and match feature lines.
Convert the driveway left and right side polylines into a feature lines. Name the feature lines appropriately
(For example: 380+75 LT LT and 380+75 LT RT). Do not assign the feature line a style. The feature line will
automatically adopt elevations from the edge of shoulder and match feature lines.
Use the Grade/Slope Between Points command to straight-line grade the left and right sides between the
edge of shoulder and the match location.
9:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-005.mp4
120.070.005
Create Gradings
Create a Grading Group in the same Site as the driveway. Name the Grading Group the driveway location.
Check Automatic Surface Creation and Use Group Name.
Set the Grading Criteria Set to "Rural Driveway". (if your drawing does not have the Rural Driveway criteria
set, use or create a slope to surface criteria)
Create 6:1 Gradings along the left and right driveway feature lines. If the roadway foreslope is steeper than
the driveway side slope, the gradings should extend from the driveway slope intercept (match location) to
approximately +/-10' short of the edge of gravel shoulder. If the roadway foreslope is the same as or flatter
than the driveway side slope, the grading can extend the full length of the feature line.
Tip: When prompted for the grading end location, it is useful to use the Length option at the command line.
The command will then notify you of the length remaining to the end of the feature line.
Create additional gradings along the left and right driveway feature lines that match the roadway foreslope if
the roadway foreslope is steeper than the driveway side slope. These gradings should extend from a point
about +/-0.01' from the end of edge of gravel shoulder to the edge of gravel shoulder.
Create Grading Transitions (only if the roadway foreslope is steeper than the driveway side slopes)
Select Create Transition from the Grading Creation Tools
Select the feature line.
Select a point between the 6:1 grading and 4:1 grading.
Save the drawing
Create Grading Infill for Driveway Top
Choose the Create Infill command from the Grading Creation Tools.
Select the regions defining the top of the driveway and hit enter.
You will see the completed driveway surface in the isometric view.
Save the file.
12:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-006.mp4
120.070.006
7:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-007.mp4
120.070.007
Driveways with skew and multiple slopes - Determine Driveway Elevation and Grade
All the steps outlined above apply.
Convert the additional polyline representing the slope break in the driveway profile to a feature line. Assign
the feature line the standard style.
Assign this feature line elevation by using the Adjacent Elevations by Reference command.
8:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-008.mp4
7/3/2015
120.070.008
6:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-070-009.mp4
120.070.009
Section updated:
6/17/2015
120.080.001
Introduction
The Extract Design Surface Data Utility is used to extract the breaklines that define the design surface.
The tool uses a 2 step process. During the first step, the utility systematically follows through each of
the surface definition operations and extracts the breaklines that were contributed by that operation. The
extracted breaklines are inserted into a new base AutoCAD drawing, as indicated in the Select a drawing
template input. Each breakline is assigned a layer based on its source using the template
SourceFile.SourceObject.ObjectType.
7/3/2015
Once all of the source breaklines have been extracted and consolidated into a single dwg file, the tool
proceeds with the validation phase. The tool can be setup to proceed to the validation phase
automatically, or it can be triggered manually by the user. At this stage, the breaklines are in the form of
line segments. The validation phase included four processes that analyze each line segment:
1. Duplicate removal: All line segments that are redundant with another line segment within a
specified tolerance are deleted.
2. Surface Paste: All breakline segments from contributing sources are added to the dwg file. If a
surface paste occurs in the surface definitions, any breakline segments that are within the surface
past boundary and removed and replaced with the breakline segments of the pasted surfaces. For
example: The Rfnt-Top surface has the Rfnt-Datum surface pasted into it. Then, the Crdr-Top
surface is pasted over the Rfnt-Datum surface. The utility will extract breakline segments from both
the Rfnt-Datum surface and the Crdr-Top surface. During the validation phase, the utility will
removal all line segments from the Rfnt-Datum surface that fall within the boundary of the Crdr-Top
surface.
3. Line Segment Validation: Each breakline segment is compared to the TIN edges of the design
surface. If the midpoint of a breakline segment does not fall on a TIN edge within the specified
tolerance, it is moved to a new layer with the prefix LINE_NO_MATCH. If the midpoint of the
breakline segment falls on a TIN edge, but its end vertices do not match the TIN edge vertices
within the specified tolerance, it is moved to a new layer with the prefix LINE_NO_MATCH.
4. Breakline Segment Join: The utility joins the breakline segments if their end vertices are within a
specified tolerance. The end result is a series of 3D Polylines.
7:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-002.mp4
120.080.002
7/3/2015
6:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-003.mp4
120.080.003
7:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-004.mp4
120.080.004
Results Interpretation
There will be areas that will be greater than 0.01 ft difference from the design surface. A common sense
approach must be used to evaluate these areas. Set the display style for design surface to triangles.
Set the display style for the FromBreaklines surface to triangles. Choose styles that have different
colors so you can distinguish each surface.
1. First, check for areas that are within the subgrade shoulder points. In most cases, these areas
appear based on the way the surface triangulates. To check if the breaklines produced a valid
surface, perform a swap edge command on the TIN edge of the from breaklines surface. Set the
volume surface to Rebuild-Automatic. The color from the volume surface should disappear. If it
does not, further troubleshooting of the breaklines is needed.
2. Once the areas within the subgrade shoulder points have been reviewed, view the Volume
Surface properties. Under the Statistics tab, expand General. Observe the minimum and maximum
elevation. These are the maximum deviations between the design surface and the FromBreaklines
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
surface. Do they seem reasonable for areas outside of the subgrade shoulder points?
3. If there are areas that significantly differ from the design surface, go back to the extracted
breaklines dwg file. Review any breaklines in the area that are on a LINE_NO_MATCH layer. They
can offer clues regarding the differences or why some breaklines may be different.
TIP: The Extract Design Surface Data utility includes a custom Tooltip toggle. This button will
trigger a detailed tooltip for each breakline that displays additional information about its origin.
4. You may notice areas where breaklines have gaps. If the gaps are small enough where they do
not impact surface triangulation, they are ok.
5. If for some reason, the Extract Design Surface Data utility removed a valid breakline during the
extraction process, that missing breakline can be obtained manually from the source.
6:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-005.mp4
120.080.005
These best practices for surface model creation will make the breakline extraction much simpler. If
these best practices are not followed, the breakline extraction process will not work as intended.
Links for corridor surface definition. This is a bad practice for the deliverable that we want to
achieve. We want the surfaces to be defined by longitudinal breaklines because these are the
elements that our contractors are looking for. It is not a good idea to mix links and feature lines in
the surface definition because once you include the links, there is not a good way to know if you
have all of the required feature lines. If you have all of the required feature lines, there really isnt
any need for the links. One argument for links is that they help force desired triangulation in certain
situations. An intersection radius is an example of that. However, this can easily be resolved by
adding a single line or 3D Polyline to the refinement surface definition.
Surface edit tools. We do not want designers using the surface edit tools, except is certain
situations.
7/3/2015
Added surface definition created by these tools cannot be extracted and delivered for
construction. In the example from the first bullet, the add line or swap edge commands are
often used to clean up the intersection triangulation. However, the proper way to address that is
by adding a line or 3D polyline as a breakline. The commands highlighted in pink should not be
needed for design surface definition. The delete line and delete point command can be used
because they take away previously created elements of the surface definition. Delete line is
often used to remove external triangulation that was not removed by a corridor boundary. Using
the delete point command will cause the points source breakline segment to be no longer valid
and will therefore be excluded from the breakline deliverable by the Design Surface Data
Extractor. Adjustments to the corridor or addition of breaklines should address situations where
the remaining surface edit commands would otherwise be used. When breaklines are extracted
from the refinement surface definition, you should be able to recreate the refinement surface
from those breaklines alone. If these surfaces edits are used, the surface created from the
extracted breaklines will not match the refinement surface. In summary, the surface edits
cannot be extracted and conveyed in the breakline file.
6:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-006.mp4
120.080.006
Redundant Feature Lines. Avoid creating corridor surfaces with two feature lines from two
difference regions on top of each other. This problem does not become apparent until the breakline
extraction process is performed. Going back to the intersection example again, what typically
happens is we get two feature lines in the red-highlighted portions.
Along the main roadway, you get a Crown feature line from the curb return region and an ETW feature
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
line from the travel way region. Along the side road, you get a crown feature line from both curb return
regions. The feature lines end up competing to define the surface. Then, when you extract the
breaklines from the refinement surface definition, neither of the competing feature lines are coincident
with the triangle vertices. There are two ways that this can be addressed. The first way is to make sure
that the competing feature lines have all the same vertices. This is probably the more difficult option
because it involves adding special sections in the competing regions to get them to match. In the case
of the intersection example, the easier method is to turn the crown location parameter off in LnGeneric
for the curb return regions. That leaves only the ETW feature line for the edge of travel way portion.
However, now you dont have any feature lines for the crown along the side road. That is addressed by
adding a region along the side road with a simple assembly such as what I have shown below.
Combine Refinement Surfaces. There should be a single refinement surface for each type. In
other words, a single Refinement-Top, a single Refinement-Datum, etc. This makes the surfaces
easier to manage for the contractor. It also makes extracting the breaklines simpler because you
dont need to run the design data extraction utility on multiple surfaces and combine the data in an
additional step.
2:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-080-007.mp4
120.080.007
Section updated:
3/1/2013
7/3/2015
120.100.001
120.100.002
2. In each Assembly, remove the subassemblies that lie outside the subgrade shoulder point.
2:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-003.mp4
120.100.003
3. Delete all corridor surfaces except Top, Rename Top surface to Pavement
7:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-004.mp4
120.100.004
4. Set all Regions to a frequency matching WisDOT 3D Surface Model Standards for Pavement surfaces,
Create Data Shortcut for Corridor-Pavement surface
5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-005.mp4
120.100.005
5. Create Refinement Pavement surface. Review definition of refinement Top surface, replicate edits in
Pavement surface.
0:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-100-006.mp4
120.100.006
120.110 Beamguard
Section updated:
6/25/2013
120.120 Crossovers
120.120.001
Section updated:
6/25/2013
Section updated:
3/10/2014
120.130.001
7/3/2015
16:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-130-002.mp4
120.130.002
7/3/2015
13:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-130-003.mp4
120.130.003
7/3/2015
120.130.004
7/3/2015
Section updated:
4/13/2015
0:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-000.mp4
120.140.000
Introduction
Goals
Curb ramp surface models
Dynamic relationship with the roadway design (vertical)
Allows for earlier design of curb ramps
Applicable to projects with dynamic roadway designs
Alternative
Non-Dynamic models using feature line/grading tools
Early design could mean re-design
Applicable to rehab projects with static roadway designs
Workflow Overview
Verify Roadway Design
Create Curb Cuts
Curb Ramp Setup Corridors/Surfaces
Link Roadway/Sidewalk Design to Curb Ramps
Create Alignments/Profiles representing Curb Ramp Break Lines
Create Curb Ramp Corridor/Surface
Grading Object for Daylight
Paste to Refinement Surface
3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-001.mp4
120.140.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-140-001-proj-dataset.zip
Type 2 Curb Ramps. (2 sidewalks with terraces approach an intersection, tapered sides)
120-141-001-proj-dataset.zip
6:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-002.mp4
120.140.002
Design Checks
7/3/2015
Refer to FDM 11-46-10.1.1. Verify that the roadway longitudinal slope (cross walk cross slope) at is
no more that 1.5%. If the intersection is signalized or uncontrolled, the main roadway can maintain
its profile.
Check Curb Radii Profiles
Verify that the curb radii profiles do not exceed 1.5% at the crosswalk locations. A quick way to
verify these locations is to create AutoCAD points where the crosswalk intersects the curb flange
alignments. Then, project these points to the curb radii profile views. Adjust the curb radii profiles
as needed.
5:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-003.mp4
120.140.003
Notice that instead of using a standard curb and gutter subassembly, a group of generic
subassemblies were used to form the curb. These generic LinkWidthAndSlope subassemblies will
follow superelevation data assign to the curb return alignment.
4:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-004.mp4
120.140.004
Rebuild the corridor. The curb cuts will appear in the model.
5:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-005.mp4
120.140.005
6:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-006.mp4
120.140.006
5:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-007.mp4
120.140.007
Unless the roadway intersection is a perfect 90-degree, auxiliary alignments will need to be made
for the curb ramp setup corridor base line.
Create a new miscellaneous alignment along the primary roadway that extends beyond the
intersection curb ramps, and is perpendicular to the secondary road. Name this alignment <[Primary
Road]>-Aux. For example: MainSt-Aux
Create a new miscellaneous alignment along the secondary roadway that extends beyond the
intersection curb ramps, and is perpendicular to the primary road. Name this alignment
<[Secondary Road]>-Aux. For example: FirstSt-Aux
7:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-008.mp4
120.140.008
7/3/2015
Choose either the Setup-CurbRamps-L or Setup-CurbRamps-R assembly, depending on the side of the road
the curb ramp is located.
Set the Target Surface to the Crdr-Setup-BOC surface.
In the Baseline parameters, set the start and end stations to the start and end of the curb ramp.
Set the targets. The targeting is described in the subassembly names and should be apparent.
Click Ok to build the corridor.
All curb ramps that are located along the primary roadway can be added to this corridor.
Create a second setup corridor called Setup-CurbRamps-<[Secondary Road]>. Example: SetupCurbRamps-FirstSt
Set the baseline to the Secondary Road Auxillary alignment and existing surface profile.
Follow the same steps as the primary road setup corridor outlined above.
All curb ramps that are located along the side road can be added to this corridor.
2:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-009.mp4
120.140.009
8:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-010.mp4
120.140.010
Determine which curb ramp is controlling. The curb ramp elevation that is controlling (primary
road or secondary road), is the one that is lower.
Create a Surface Profile for the primary roadway and secondary roadway back of sidewalk
alignments. The surface profiles should be created on the controlling curb ramp surface.
Create an intersection object to tie the primary road sidewalk profile to the secondary road back of
sidewalk surface profile created in the previous step.
Home tab, Create Design panel, Intersections-Create Intersection
Digitize the location where the primary road inside sidewalk alignment intersects the
secondary road outside sidewalk alignment.
Select the Secondary Road back of sidewalk alignment as the main road alignment.
In the Geometry Details portion of the Create Intersection Dialogue, uncheck the Create
or specify offset alignments box.
Verify that the secondary road alignment is priority 1 and the primary road alignment is
priority 2.
Verify that the curb ramp setup surface profile is chosen for the priority 1 alignment
Verify that the proposed sidewalk profile is chosen for the priority 2 alignment.
Click Create Intersection
Repeat the previous step to create an intersection object where the Secondary inside sidewalk
alignment intersects the Primary outside sidewalk alignment.
This time, the primary road outside alignment and surface profile are priority 1. The secondary
road inside alignment and proposed profile are priority 2.
7/3/2015
The proposed sidewalk profiles are now dynamically locked to the curb ramp upper landing
elevation. When the roadway elevation changes, the curb ramp elevation changes automatically
with it, and so does the proposed sidewalk profile.
Add a PVI to the proposed sidewalk profiles transition down to the curb ramp upper landing.
1:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-011.mp4
120.140.011
2:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-012.mp4
120.140.012
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-140-001-proj-dataset.zip
Create Curb Ramp DWG 120-140-002-proj-dataset.zip
Create a new dwg and name it Crdr-CurbRamps.dwg (This file has already been created for you in the
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
4:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-013.mp4
120.140.013
7/3/2015
The back of sidewalk alignment is made up of the following PI locations. Suggesting naming: Int<[Primary Road]>-<[Secondary Road]>-<[Quadrant]>-Sdwk-Out. Example: Int-MainSt-FirstSt-SESdwk-Out
Location on the outside sidewalk alignment where the curb radius ends.
Intersection of the outside sidewalk alignments
Location on the outside sidewalk alignment where the curb radius ends.
5:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-014.mp4
120.140.014
The ramp taper alignments are made up of the following PI locations. Suggesting naming: Int<[Primary Road]>-<[Secondary Road]>-<[Quadrant]>-Taper-<[Adjacent Roadway]>. Example: IntMainSt-FirstSt-SE-Taper-MainSt
Location on the back of curb alignment, adjacent to the ramp, were the curb head is full
(top of taper).
Intersection of the inside sidewalk alignment and the outside sidewalk alignment
Location on the inside sidewalk alignment where the curb radius ends.
Hint for finding the location along the back of curb alignment: Give the Crdr-Ultimate surface
a triangles style. View the surface from a 3D Isometric perspective. Draw a polyline by
snapping to the back of curb. This will reveal the PI locations in plan view when creating the
alignment. Caution: The surface triangle vertices are not necessarily coincident with the
back of curb alignment. The PI location needs to be on the back of curb alignment, so use
the intersection snap to find the intersection of the back of curb alignment and the surface
triangle line.
7/3/2015
3:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-015.mp4
120.140.015
5:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-016.mp4
120.140.016
7/3/2015
120.140.017
For the Alignment/Profile combinations listed in Blue, there are other possible alignment/surface profile
combinations that can be used. The combinations listed in the table are one option. The important thing
is to somehow tie the proposed profile to the surface profile that will represent the curb ramp elevation.
When creating the intersection objects, this notification will be presented. Choose Create
intersection with dynamic profiles.
5:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-018.mp4
120.140.018
7/3/2015
2:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-019.mp4
120.140.019
If the initial profiles created earlier were put somewhere near elevation 0, the profile views may appear
very tall. The beginning and ending tangents for these profiles need to be deleted. Select the profile
and use the Delete Entity command to delete these two tangent sections.
5:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-020.mp4
120.140.020
2:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-021.mp4
120.140.021
Select the CurbRamps corridor and click the Corridor Surfaces button from the contextual ribbon.
Create a new corridor surface called Crdr-CurbRamps
Add the Ramp feature code to the surface definition.
Add an Interactive Hide Boundary using the curb ramp outside sidewalk feature line. Name the
boundary something to describe what it is. For example: MainSt-FirstSt-SE-Hide
Since it is a single feature line, Civil 3D will notify you that the boundary is invalid. Click
Ok to return to the boundaries dialog.
Click on the boundary definition ellipsis.
Click the plus button and select the curb ramp outside sidewalk feature line again. Hit
Enter to return to the boundary definition.
Set the station range so it is 0+00 to 0+00.
The boundary will now be well formed.
7/3/2015
5:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-022.mp4
120.140.022
A separate grading surface needs to be created for the slope behind the curb ramp sidewalk.
Create a new Site called CurbRamps.
Select the curb ramp corridor
Choose Feature Lines From Corridor from the contextual ribbon.
Select the curb ramp outside sidewalk feature line and hit Enter.
Put the feature line in the CurbRamps site
Give the feature line a distinguishable name. For Example: MainSt-FirstSt-SE-Sdwk-Out
Style does not matter and smoothing can be unchecked.
Make sure the Create dynamic link to corridor box is checked.
Click ok and hit enter
The grading will target the existing ground surface. However, MDU has seen on several occasions
that the grading surface will disappear when closing and reopening the drawing. The workaround for
this is to create a new existing ground surface in the drawing.
Create a new surface called Exist-GrdgTarget
Paste the data referenced existing ground surface into the Exist-GrdgTarget surface
Set the surface to rebuild automatically
Create a new grading group in the CurbRamps site. Call the grading group Grdg-CurbRampDaylight. Make sure the Automatic Surface Creation and Use Group Name boxes are checked. Set
the tessellation spacing to triangle spacing that is desired.
Open the Grading Creation Tools
Set the active site to CurbRamps. Set the active grading group to Grdg-CurbRamps-Daylight. Set
the target surface to Exist-GrdgTarget
Adjust the grading criteria to what is desired.
Place the grading on the dynamically link corridor feature line.
Hint: If you see strange triangulation like this, try increasing the frequency on the corridor baseline used
to get the dynamically linked feature line.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
3:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-140-023.mp4
120.140.023
Save the DWG, Create Data Shortcuts, Add Curb Ramps Surfaces to Rfnt-Top
Save the DWG.
Create data shortcuts for the Crdr-CurbRamps and the Grdg-CurbRamp-Daylight surfaces.
Data reference these surfaces in to the project Rfnt-Top dwg.
Paste the surfaces into the Rfnt-Top surface.
Section updated:
4/13/2015
2:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-001.mp4
120.141.001
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/120/120-141-001-proj-dataset.zip
Type 4B1 Curb Ramps. (1 sidewalk with terrace approaches an intersection, tapered sides)
This scenario is the same as the type 2 except an additional alignment/profile is needed to blend the sidewalk into
the roadway without a sidewalk. The data set included in this portion of the training has been completed up to the
point where additional alignment needs to be created for blending.
120-141-001-proj-dataset.zip
Establish Curb Ramp Alignments in Roadway Corridor File
Alignments are already created in the data set. In the same way as scenario 1 (Type 2 Curb Ramps), the
curb ramp landing (triangular 1.5% area) needs to be created in the roadway corridor file.
Unlike scenario 1, the ramp alignment is not created in the curb ramp corridor file. Instead, it needs to be
created in the roadway corridor file. It is put in the roadway corridor file to act as a target for the curb ramp
setup corridor because there is not a crossing sidewalk alignment to act as this target.
3:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-002.mp4
120.141.002
3:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-003.mp4
120.141.003
Create a surface profile for the ramp alignment. The surface profile is on the Crdr-SetupCurbRamps surface.
Place an intersection object on the inside sidewalk alignment at the top of the curb ramp
alignment. The priority 1 alignment/profile is the ramp alignment and surface profile.
7/3/2015
5:10 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-004.mp4
120.141.004
Create the curb ramp taper alignments in the Crdr-CurbRamps dwg file.
The inside taper alignment starts at the back of curb, continues to the top of the ramp, and
terminates on the sidewalk at the end of the radius.
The outside taper alignment starts at the back of curb and terminates at the top of the ramp.
7:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-005.mp4
120.141.005
7/3/2015
To blend this to the single slope configuration behind the sidewalk, first create an alignment along
the edge of the 4% slope on the adjacent roadway. As long as the alignment extends beyond the
area where the blending will occur, the length does not matter.
Create the blending alignment. The blending alignment begins somewhere along the profile match
alignment (where you want to match into the adjacent roadway slopes). It follows the profile match
alignment and connects to the Outside Taper alignment. Then, it follows the Outside Taper
alignment up the ramp. It terminates on the outside sidewalk alignment at the end of the radius.
2:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-006.mp4
120.141.006
7/3/2015
120.141.007
7:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-008.mp4
120.141.008
Priority 2 Alignment/Profile
Inside Taper/Proposed
Inside Taper/Proposed
Inside Taper/Proposed
Outside Taper/Proposed*
Outside Taper/Proposed*
ProfileMatch/Ultimate Surface
Outside Taper/Proposed
Outside Sidewalk/Crdr-Setup-CurbRamp Surface
Outside Sidewalk/Ultimate Surface
Blend/Proposed*
Blend/Proposed*
Blend/Proposed*
Blend/Proposed*
*Note that the Outside Taper Proposed profile must be created before the Blend Proposed Profile. The
Blend Proposed Profile is dependent on the Outside Taper Proposed Profile and is tied to it with an
intersection object.
If the initial profiles created earlier were put somewhere near elevation 0, the profile views may appear
very tall. The beginning and ending tangents for these profiles need to be deleted. Select the profile
and use the Delete Entity command to delete these two tangent sections.
7/3/2015
8:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-141-009.mp4
120.141.009
Section updated:
6/17/2015
120.142.001
4:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-002.mp4
120.142.002
7/3/2015
The same curb ramp setup assembly can be used. However, since the curb ramp perpendicular to the curb
return, the triangular lower landing does not exist. Therefore, the additional LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly
representing that area can be removed from the assembly.
Create data shortcuts for the curb return back of curb alignments, curb return outside sidewalk alignments, CrdrUltimate surface, and Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface.
5:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-003.mp4
120.142.003
Open the curb ramp corridor dwg file. Data reference the curb return back of curb return alignment,
Crdr-Ultimate surface, Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface.
Create a new alignment representing the outside sidewalk. This can be an offset alignment to the
back of curb or it can be a centerline alignment. It should not be a miscellaneous alignment
because superelevation will be assigned in a later step.
Create a new alignment representing the curb ramp. View the Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface
with triangles turned on. This will allow for easy placement of the alignment Pis.
7:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-004.mp4
120.142.004
Turn the Crdr-Setup-CurbRamps surface triangles off. Turn the Crdr-Ultimate surface triangles on.
Orbit around the surface to find the tops of the curb transistions. Mark them with polylines. Return
to Top view
Create the two alignments representing the top of the ramp sides, where the curb ramp matches
into the adjacent sidewalk. Use the polylines created in the previous step to locate the intersection
of the Crdr-Ultimate triangle edge and the back of curb alignment.
Then use the station offset transparent command to locate a second PI so the alignment is
perfectly parallel to the ramp alignment.
The PI can now be moved using the extend OSNAP and snapped to the outside sidewalk
alignment.
Since intersection objects cannot be used at the ends of an alignment, the alignment must be
extended down the back of sidewalk alignment a small distance. The resulting alignments should
look like this:
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
5:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-005.mp4
120.142.005
Create a surface profile for the ramp alignment. The surface profile is created on the Crdr-SetupCurbRamps surface.
Create a surface profile for the match alignments. These surface profiles are created on the CrdrUltimate surface.
Create a surface profile for the back of curb alignment. This surface profile is created on the CrdrUltimate surface.
Create a surface profile for the outside sidewalk alignment. This surface profile is created on the
Crdr-Ultimate surface.
Create a profile view for the outside sidewalk alignment. Create an arbitrary profile that extends
beyond the limits of the alignment. These elevations will be determined using intersection objects.
Create intersection objects in the following locations along the outside sidewalk alignment.
Intersections with the two match alignments
Intersections with the two ends of the ramp alignment.
Delete the end tangents from the profile.
5:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-006.mp4
120.142.006
Add the back of curb, outside sidewalk, ramp, and match alignments as base lines in the curb
ramp corridor.
Using the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, add a region for the back of curb baseline. For now, the
region extents should be to the ends of the match alignments or beyond. These extents will be
refined later.
7/3/2015
Add three regions to the ramp alignment baseline. Using the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, the first
region should start at the back of curb and end at the outside sidewalk. Using a null assembly, the
second region should follow the portion that is coincident with the outside sidewalk alignment. Using
the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, the third region should start at the outside sidewalk and end at the
back of curb.
Using the CurbRamp-Basic assembly, add a region to each match alignment baseline. The
regions should extend from the back of curb to the outside sidewalk only.
6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-007.mp4
120.142.007
7/3/2015
Set the outside sidewalk alignment superelevation for controlling the pedestrian curb.
Begin alignment: Right Inside Lane = 0%
At Match Alignment 1: Right Inside Lane = 0%
At Ramp intersection 1: Right Inside Lane = 5000%
At Ramp Intersection 2: Right Inside Lane = 5000%
At Match Alignment 2: Right Inside Lane = 0%
At end of Alignment: Right Inside Lane = 0%
5:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-008.mp4
120.142.008
Make another copy of the CurbRamp-Basic assembly. Rename it to CurbTransition. Change the
MarkPoint subassembly point code to Top_Curb. Add the appropriate daylight subassembly to the
end of the LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly. Change the LinkWidthAndSlope subassembly point
code to Back_Curb and the width to 0.001.
Add another base line for the outside sidewalk alignment. This time, use the Crdr-Ultimate surface
profile.
Add three regions to the new outside sidewalk alignment baseline. Using the CurbTransition
assembly, the first region should start at few feet before the intersection with the match alignment.
Using a null assembly, the second region is the area between the match alignments. Using the
CurbTransition assembly, the third region should start at the intersection with the other match
alignment and extend a few feet past.
Draw a two polylines from the end of the Back_Curb feature lines to the ends of the curb transition
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Make sure the back of curb region limits match the ends of the curb transition regions.
3:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/120/120-142-009.mp4
120.142.009
Corridor Surface
Create a hide boundary for the concave area outside the daylight feature line.
7/3/2015
Section updated:
3/10/2014
4:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-010-001.mp4
125.010.001
1:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-010-002.mp4
125.010.002
1:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-010-003.mp4
7/3/2015
In WisDOTs multi-user work environment it is easy to create unwanted changes in drawings if your parts catalogs
do not have consistent contents. Because each drawing references the parts catalog at the local location unwanted
changes in the drawing can occur if a new part is created in the catalog of one computer, and then the drawing is
opened on a different computer, where a new part is not part of the local catalog.
WisDOT has addressed this issue by creating a custom Parts Catalog to be used on WisDOT projects and defined
a default location on the local drive to store the catalog.
WisDOT internal procedure
If a new part is needed or an existing part needs modifications contact Methods Development and they will work
with you to create the part needed and will update and distribute the catalog to all users. At no time should new
parts be added to the USWI_Pipe Catalog or the USWI_Structure catalog by the user. Any part that is added
locally to theses catalogs may be overwritten by the synchronization process described above.
WisDOT external procedure consultants
Consultants should contact WisDOT Methods Development team, to coordinate updates and change requests of
the USWI Parts Catalogs to maintain usability and consistency.
Section updated:
9/23/2014
10:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-015-001.mp4
125.015.001
7/3/2015
example: cover is too low at a given location) The catch is that you need to check the rules.
Rules can be re-applied at any time, but beware. They may change your design. I recommend using rules for
initial layout. Then, you take control of the design and use the rules for feedback on feasibility.
Section updated:
3/10/2014
125.020.001
6:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-002.mp4
125.020.002
10:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-003.mp4
125.020.003
13:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-004.mp4
125.020.004
7/3/2015
125.020.005
12:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-020-006.mp4
125.020.006
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/wisdot-c3d-help.pdf#Pipe_Networks
Concrete Pipe with Concrete Endwalls
Same as for metal pipe except move the line defining the flowline up by the diameter plus the wall thickness.
Wall thickness can be found on the accompanying Pipe Networks Summary pdf.
The line now represents the top of the concrete pipe. Trim the line against the feature line.
If concrete endwalls are to be used, shorten the concrete pipe on each end by the C distance shown in the
Apron Endwall Standard Detail Drawing.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Section updated:
9/23/2014
125.030.000
8:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-001.mp4
125.030.001
9:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-002.mp4
125.030.002
7/3/2015
125.030.003
10:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-004.mp4
125.030.004
13:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-005.mp4
125.030.005
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Repeat the above steps for the various different possible flow paths. Compare the catchment flow paths and
choose the one with the highest time of concentration. The catchment labels will display the time of
concentration for each catchment.
Assign that catchment with the highest time of concentration to the culvert inlet structure. This is done in the
catchment properties.
7:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-006.mp4
125.030.006
8:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-007.mp4
125.030.007
8:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-008.mp4
125.030.008
13:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-009.mp4
125.030.009
7/3/2015
can click on the ellipses to select the C values. You'll need to know the Hydrologic Soil Group of the area and
the general slope of the terrain Hydrologic Soil Group can be obtained using the USDA Web Soil Survey
mapping tool and Exhibit A-1 in TR-55. http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/HomePage.htm
Use Civil 3D to determine the slope of the terrain. Go into the surface properties and select the style called
Slope Arrows. Then, go to the Analysis tab and choose slope arrows under analysis type. Change the number
of ranges to 3 and click the Run Analysis button. Set range 1 maximum slope to 2%. Set range 2 minimum
slope to 2% and maximum slope to 6%. Set range 3 minimum slope to 6%. You can change the range colors
according to your preference or leave the defaults. Click Ok.
From the Analysis menu, click Perform Analysis. You should then received notification of a successful
analysis. The results may be saved to a location that you specify.
Click Time Series Plot to view specific details about the analysis.
When completed, save the file.
8:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-010.mp4
125.030.010
5:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-011.mp4
125.030.011
9:21 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-030-012.mp4
125.030.012
7/3/2015
125.030.013
Section updated:
9/23/2014
125.040.001
7/3/2015
From the Home tab, select Pipe Network - Pipe Network Creation Tools
Name the pipe network Storm-<description>. For example: Storm-Begin-To-4thAve
Select the Storm Sewer Parts List
Select the Cmbn-Exist-Top surface
Select the main roadway alignment
Structure and Pipe label styles can be set to <none>
10:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-002.mp4
125.040.002
3:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-003.mp4
125.040.003
6:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-004.mp4
125.040.004
4:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-005.mp4
125.040.005
6:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-006.mp4
125.040.006
Under Name Conflict Options, Choose Rename Existing Parts. Click Ok.
Once all of the trunk line structures are renamed, proceed to the lateral structures. Use the quick properties
to rename these structures.
When all of the structures have been renamed, use the quick properties to rename the pipes. The pipe
names should follow this format: <UpstreamStructure>-<DownstreamStructure>.
11:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-007.mp4
125.040.007
6:57 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-008.mp4
125.040.008
10:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-009.mp4
125.040.009
In the toolspace-prospector, under pipe networks, expand Interference checks. Right click on the interference
check and select Re-run Interference Check to double check the structure selection. The same interference
check can be re-run at any time to check pipe separation at other structures within the network.
3:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-010.mp4
125.040.010
8:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-011.mp4
125.040.011
15:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-012.mp4
125.040.012
5:33 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-013.mp4
125.040.013
7/3/2015
or reconstructing.
3:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-014.mp4
125.040.014
2:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-015.mp4
125.040.015
8:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-016.mp4
125.040.016
3:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-040-018.mp4
125.040.018
Swap parts
There are two methods for swapping parts. Civil 3D comes with a swap parts command that swaps one part at a
time. WisDOT includes an additional tool that swaps multiple parts at one time.
To swap multiple parts, first select all of the parts that you want swapped to the same new part. This can be
done by picking them on the screen, selecting them, in the prospector window, or by using the AutoCAD quick
select tool.
Type SWAPPARTS at the command line.
In the dialogue, choose the parts list that contains the desired part.
Choose the part family for pipes if pipes are being swapped, or structures if structures are being swapped.
Finally, choose the specific part to swap to in that part family.
Section updated:
9/23/2014
7/3/2015
4:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-050-001.mp4
125.050.001
3:46 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/125/125-050-002.mp4
125.050.002
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
10:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-010-001.mp4
130.010.001
General Steps:
1. Start NEW drawing based on WisDOT12.dwt
1. Save to SheetsPlan directory
2. Use Data Shortcuts to make a reference to the alignment & profile.
3. XREF Corridor drawing
4. Create Sample Lines
5. Create Section Views and/or compute materials
Section Views
Primarily used for plotting
Great place to verify your design
No design changes can be made from section views
Design changes must be made in the corridor drawing
Laid out on Sheets
A Sheet refers to the grid, print area and sheet border
The section view refers to the supporting information shown with the section; offset text, elevation text, and station
value.
The section refers to station-specific data that is coming in for the surfaces and corridor.
Quantities
Earthwork Quantities
All you need is:
1. An Existing Surface
2. A Final Datum surface
Other surfaces such as rock, marsh, excavation below subgrade (EBS) and embankment are optional
Material Quantities
Material quantities come from Corridor Shapes
Section updated:
10/1/2012
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-020-001-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-020-002-proj-dataset.zip
16:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-020-001.mp4
130.020.001
7/3/2015
8:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-020-002.mp4
130.020.002
Situations where you may need to make changes to your Sample Lines:
You need to add sample line stations
You need to change the swath widths
For example to 75 from 150 (or vice versa)
More section information is available
Examples: a new corridor surface is generated; a pipe network needs to be shown
#1 Rule of Sample Lines and Cross Sections:
Always look for a way to makes changes to the group as a whole.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-020-002-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-020-002-proj-dataset.zip
5:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-030-001.mp4
130.030.001
Computing Volumes
You can compute volumes as soon as you have:
Proposed Data
Datum surface
6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-030-002.mp4
130.030.002
Volume Reports
A Volume Report creates a text file that will open in Internet Explorer.
Volume Tables& Material Volume Tables
Total Volume Table and Material Volume table place information directly into AutoCAD.
The Style sheet determines the format and what information is shown when generating a volume report.
Exercise: Report Volumes
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines, you may continue
working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to your local Civil 3D projects
folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
2. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg
2. Go to the Analyze tab > Volumes and Materials panel and click Volume Report.
3. Click the folder icon next to Select a Style sheet.
1. Select Earthwork.xsl
2. Click OK.
4. When Internet Explorer pops up, it may ask you if you would like to run scripts. Click Yes.
5. You should now see the volume report with data in most of the columns.
6. Right-click anywhere in the browser window and choose Select All.
7. Right-click again and select Copy.
8. Launch Microsoft Excel. (Keep Civil 3D and the Internet Explorer Window open.)
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
130.030.003
7/3/2015
Section updated:
10/1/2012
6:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-040-001.mp4
130.040.001
Section updated:
10/1/2012
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-050-001-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-050-002-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-050-003-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-050-004-proj-dataset.zip
7:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-001.mp4
130.050.001
7/3/2015
\USWI\planproduction\xsection\
3. Pick the X-Section 1 IN 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert option for the layout.
4. Click OK.
6. Make sure the group plot style is set to By Page Bottom to top and click Next.
7. Verify that the offset range is set to Automatic and is listed as -75 and 75.
1. This length comes directly from the sample lines and should be left as-is.
2. Click Next.
8. Do not make any changes to the elevation range page. Click Next.
9. On the Section Display options page, clear the checkboxes next to:
1. CutCommon
2. Embankment
3. Asphalt
4. Base
5. Subbase.
6. Click Next.
10. No action is needed on the Data Bands or Section View Tables pages, so click Create section Views.
11. Click off to the side in an empty location on your drawing.
1. You should have many pages of cross sections.
12. Save the drawing.
End of exercise.
7:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-002.mp4
130.050.002
Exercise: Add n Additional Sample Line & Add it to the section views.
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercise where you created sample lines, you may continue
working in that file. If not, extract the example files associated with this exercise to your local Civil 3D projects
folder.
1. Open Civil 3D 2012
2. Verify that your data shortcuts path is listed as c:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\
3. Open the file 090100_xs.dwg.
4. If you receive a message Corridor is out of date and may be out of sync with other objects,
dismiss panorama by clicking the green checkbox.
2. On the Home tab > Profile and Section Views panel, click sample lines.
1. Press enter to select USH 51 Best Fit from Exist and click OK.
2. When prompted to key-in a station along the alignment, type in 19155 and press enter.
3. Type in 75 for the left swath width and press enter.
4. Type 75 for the right swath width and press enter.
Feel free to experiment by adding stations on your own. Just remember to set the swath widths to
the uniform 75 for both the left and right sides. If you add a sample line where one already
exists, civil 3d will ask if you wish to delete the old one.
5. Press escape to complete the command.
3. Start the rectangle command from the Home tab > Draw panel.
1. Trace the first sheet by drawing a rectangle directly over it.
3. In Prospector, go to the alignment listing.
1. Expand USH 51 Best Fit from Exist.
2. Expand Sample Line Groups
3. Expand Section View Groups.
4. Right-click section view groups and select Delete.
4. Go back to the Home tab of the ribbon > Profile & Section Views
1. Click Section Views > Create Multiple Views.
5. On the General page of the wiszard, set the Section view style to Sheets 1 In 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert
1. Click Next.
6. On the Section Placement page of the wizard, click the ellipsis next to Template for Cross Section Sheet.
1. Click the ellipsis again to browse to the file wisdot12-09-xs.dwt.
2. This will be located in: C:\Users\<your_name>\AppData\Local\Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu\Template
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
\USWI\planproduction\xsection\
3. Pick the X-Section 1 IN 10 FT Horiz 10 FT Vert option for the layout.
4. Click OK.
7. Make sure the group plot style is set to By Page Bottom to top and click Next.
8. Verify that the offset range is set to Automatic and is listed as -75 and 75.
1. This length comes directly from the sample lines and should be left as-is.
2. Click Next.
9. Do not make any changes to the elevation range page. Click Next.
10. On the Section Display options page, clear the checkboxes next to:
1. CutCommon
2. Embankment
3. Asphalt
4. Base
5. Subbase.
6. Click Next.
11. No action is needed on the Data Bands or Section View Tables pages, so click Create section Views.
12. Using the rectangle you created earlier as a guide, place the section views in the same location by
snapping to the lower-left corner of the rectangle.
13. Save the drawing.
14. End of Exercise.
7:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-050-003.mp4
130.050.003
7/3/2015
130.050.004
The only thing to remember at this point is to add the sheets to the sheetset manager.
Click the ellipsis and browse to C:\Civil 3D Projects\11111111\SheetsPlan
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
2:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-001.mp4
130.060.001
4:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-002.mp4
130.060.002
5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-003.mp4
130.060.003
6:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-004.mp4
130.060.004
4:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-005.mp4
130.060.005
1:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-006.mp4
130.060.006
2:47 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-007.mp4
130.060.007
3:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-008.mp4
130.060.008
1:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-009.mp4
130.060.009
5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-010.mp4
130.060.010
10:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-011.mp4
130.060.011
Multiple custom text markers at common points using corridor feature lines 1
5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-012.mp4
130.060.012
Multiple custom text markers at common points using corridor feature lines 2
4:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-060-013.mp4
130.060.013
Section updated:
7/1/2010
130.070.001
3:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-002.mp4
130.070.002
4:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-003.mp4
130.070.003
4:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-004.mp4
7/3/2015
130.070.004
8:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-005.mp4
130.070.005
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-006.mp4
130.070.006
6:48 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-007.mp4
130.070.007
4:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-008.mp4
130.070.008
2:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-009.mp4
130.070.009
6:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-010.mp4
130.070.010
4:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-011.mp4
130.070.011
3:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-012.mp4
130.070.012
3:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-013.mp4
130.070.013
7:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-014.mp4
130.070.014
6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-015.mp4
130.070.015
8:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-016.mp4
130.070.016
2:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-017.mp4
130.070.017
4:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-018.mp4
130.070.018
6:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-019.mp4
130.070.019
8:00 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-020.mp4
130.070.020
2:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-070-021.mp4
130.070.021
Review
Section updated:
4/13/2015
7/3/2015
8:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-075-001.mp4
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-075-001-proj-dataset-fin.zip
** NOTE ** This method should only be used if a survey database is not available. If a survey database is
available, that provides a shorter workflow for projecting survey figures onto cross sections. That method is found
at 130.075.002.
Prerequisites
Before starting this training module users should have a working knowledge of Civil 3D corridor modeling and
cross section sheet production. The cross sections sheets drawing should have already been created before
moving on to this module
Objectives
Projection styles are used to project AutoCAD objects such as 3Dpolylines, feature lines, blocks, 3D cogo points,
survey figures and 3D solids onto profile views and section views. Objects are represented by marker styles and
label styles. Projection styles are very useful in showing locations of utilities, and ROW locations in section views.
Elevations can be assigned to the projections based on the object elevation itself or based on a surface or profile.
Projection styles are dynamically linked to the objects they reference. However, when projected objects are added
to a drawing, the markers and labels do not update until the projections command is re-run. This module will
demonstrate how to apply and update projection styles for feature lines.
Obtaining Data from Utilities File
Data found in existing conditions utilities files can be inserted into a cross section drawing for use with projection
styles.
1. Open the existing Uti-Ex.dwg file found in C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12342014\BaseData.
Each of the utilities line work groups (electric, gas, etc.) will need to be converted to feature lines.
2. Isolate each separate utilities linework layer one at a time by picking one polyline in a group and picking the
Isolate button in the Home tab of the ribbon.
Once a utility layer is isolated go to the Home tab of the ribbon and pick Feature Line>Create Feature
Lines From Objects. Then select all visible linework.
In the Create Feature Lines dialog box, check the Style box in order to select the proper style. From the
drop-down list select the appropriate E UTL layer for each utility group.
Check the Erase existing entities box so that the old linework is replace with feature lines and there is
no redundant linework.
3. Save the Uti-Ex.dwg file, and close it. This file will be inserted into your cross sections drawing later in the
workflow.
Setting Up the Cross Section Drawing for Projections
4. Open the training cross sections drawing Crdr-25_xs.dwg
Ensure that the corridor file is an XREF in the cross section drawing.
Ensure that the following data has been referenced:
Existing Ground surface while the section data for the existing ground surface can be
obtained from the corridor XREF file, we will need the surface itself referenced from a data
shortcut in order to sample its elevations for the projection markers.
Note: All projections will use the existing ground surface to set elevations.
Proposed centerline alignment and design profile
All existing ROW alignments
Ensure that your sample line group has been created, and that your section views exist in the
drawing.
Create Feature Lines from Existing ROW Alignments
Alignments cannot be projected in Civil 3D, but feature lines can be created from the existing ROW alignments,
and these can be projected.
5. Home, Feature Line, Create Feature Line From Alignment.
Uncheck the Weed Points option
Select E RW Existing Right-Of-Way for the style, and select OK. This will need to be done for each
separate existing ROW alignment.
Insert Uti-Ex.dwg Into Cross Section Drawing
The Uti-Ex.dwg file will now need to be inserted into the cross section drawing, and the feature lines from that file
will need to be assigned to a site.
6. Go to Insert , Block, Insert.
Browse to the Uti-Ex.dwg file for the project, and make sure none of the boxes are unchecked for
Insertion Point, Scale, or Rotation.
Be sure to check the Explode option.
click OK.
7. Right-click in model space and select Quick Select.
In the Quick Select dialog box select:
Apply to: Entire drawing
Object type: Feature line
Operator: Select All
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
130.075.002
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-075-002-proj-dataset.zip
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-075-002-proj-dataset-fin.zip
Prerequisites
Before starting this training module users should have a working knowledge of Civil 3D corridor modeling and
cross section sheet production. The cross sections sheets drawing should have already been created before
moving on to this module.
Objectives
Projection styles are used to project AutoCAD objects such as 3Dpolylines, feature lines, blocks, 3D cogo points,
survey figures and 3D solids onto profile views and section views. Objects are represented by marker styles and
label styles. Projection styles are very useful in showing locations of utilities, and ROW locations in section views.
Elevations can be assigned to the projections based on the object elevation itself or based on a surface or profile.
Projection styles are dynamically linked to the objects they reference. However, when projected objects are added
to a drawing, the markers and labels do not update until the projections command is re-run. This module will
demonstrate how to apply and update projection styles for survey figures.
Obtaining Utilities Data from Survey Database
Survey figures representing existing conditions utilities found in the project survey database can be inserted into a
cross section drawing for use with projection styles.
1. Open the training cross sections drawing (Crdr-25_xs.dwg)
This dwg should already have the corridor file as an XREF within it, and the section sheets created.
The Exist surface is data referenced into the drawing.
2. Click on the Survey tab in toolspace, and right-click on Survey Databases and choose Set Working Folder.
When prompted for a working folder location, navigate to C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12342014\BaseData
\Survey and click OK.
3. Right-click on Projection Styles Training which is under the Survey Databases heading in toolspace, and
select Open for edit. This will open the example survey database to give you access to insert data into your
current drawing.
Each of the utilities survey figure groups (electric, gas, etc.) will already have a survey query created for it. You
can choose which of these utilities groups you would like to add to your cross section drawing. These are
found under the Survey Queries heading.
4. Right-click on each query you would like to insert and select Insert into drawing.
If you would like to insert them all at once, you can right-click on the Figures heading and select Insert
into drawing.
Confirm that the survey figure have been inserted into model space in your cross sections drawing, and then
right-click on the Projection Styles Training survey database and select Close survey database.
Applying Utilities Projection Styles to Cross Sections
5. To project all survey figures to all cross sections type the command PROJECTOBJECTSTOMULTISECT.
Select either a section view or a sample line from model space.
When the dialog box appears, uncheck all object types from the list except survey figures.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Section updated:
6/17/2015
Exercise file
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/130/130-077-exercise-file.zip
2:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-001.mp4
130.077.001
Introduction
** WARNING ** Lines representing surfaces in cross-sections should NEVER be modified from the cross section
only. Changing the representation of design surfaces only in the cross sections and not in the original surface
introduces a conflict in design data provided to the contractor. The design model surfaces should always be
reflected accurately in cross sections.
Automatic and manual labels
Grade and Elevation/Offset labels either can be automatic or manual. Automatic labels are managed by the Code
Set Style and keep synchronized with changes to the corridor and section views. Manual labels keep synchronized
with the section view, but not the corridor.
Manual labels should generally be avoided and only used when necessary and it is certain there will be no more
edits to the corridor.
2:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-002.mp4
130.077.002
Code set styles manage many objects. For this topic, it is sufficient to know that they manage automatic
grade and elevation/offset labels. Code set styles can be applied to many different objects. They
include:
Subassemblies
Assemblies
Corridors
Section views (including the corridor section editor)
Section view groups
The wide reach of code set styles is important to understand for this topic because changes to code set
styles will be seen throughout a file, not only in the object that is currently being worked on.
Rebuild corridor to make sure corridor is up-to-date.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Custom code set styles should be named either for the section view group they are being applied to or
some unique feature that they have. Some examples would be XS Sheets - Mainline stage 2, XS
Sheets - ElevOff left only.
4:03 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-003.mp4
130.077.003
This method is good for making changes to specific point codes across an entire section view group or
selected section views.
Open a code set style for editing. That can either be done from:
Toolspace Settings
General... Multipurpose Styles... Code Set Styles
or from the Section View Group properties.
Right-click on the Section View Group for the cross-sections and click "Properties".
Click on the "Sections" tab and click on the Style for the referenced corridor.
Select the appropriate code set style and click the "Edit Style" button.
7/3/2015
Grade labels are associated with links. Elevation Offset labels are associated with point codes. Label
styles can be changed for any point or link codes used in the section view group.
** TIP ** View a section with point and/or link codes visible while working on code set style edits. The
standard code set styles that include these attributes are "CRDR Proposed - Point codes" and "CRDR
Proposed - Point and Link codes".
There are 2 methods to accomplish this in a typical cross sections file.
Change the code set style of one section view in a section view group, make the changes, and
then change the code set style for the one section view back to the rest of the section view group.
This can be done by selecting a section view in modelspace by clicking on the station value of the
section. Right-click and click on "Section View Properties" In the Sections tab, override the style of
the corridor section.
Create a full or partial copy of the section view group being worked with and set the code set
style to "CRDR Proposed - Point codes" or "CRDR Proposed - Point and Link
codes".
Once a code set style is created that looks correct, it can be applied to an entire section view group or
override specific section views as shown above.
3:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-004.mp4
7/3/2015
This method is good for changing the layout of an elevation/offset label for a point code.
There are 8 point codes and associated marker label styles specifically built for elevation/offset label customization.
They are:
ElevOff000 ElevOff045 ElevOff090 ElevOff135 ElevOff180 ElevOff225 ElevOff270 ElevOff315
East
Northeast North
Northwest West
Southwest South
Southeast
The second row describes the direction from the point that the label offsets.
** INFO ** The following label styles were added to wisdot14. dwt in May 2014.
There are 4 series of label styles available to use. The XXX designates one of the eight angles above.
ElevOff-RoTxt-NoLeadXXX (Default) Rotated text, no leader
ElevOff-RoTxt-ExtLeadXXX Rotated text, extended leader
ElevOff-Txt-NoLeadXXX Top-aligned text, no leader
ElevOff-Txt-ExtLeadXXX Top-aligned text, extended leader
The marker label style of any point code can be changed to one of these styles to change the layout of an
elevation/offset label.
6:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-005.mp4
130.077.005
This method is good for placing elevation/offset labels at points in assemblies that do not have point
codes assigned to them. It can also provide a method to label the same point on the left and right sides
differently.
MarkPoint is a subassembly that places a point code in an assembly at whatever location can be
snapped to. It is located on the Generic subassembly tool palette. In conjunction with the custom point
marker label styles, MarkPoint will allow placing an elevation/offset label anywhere on a section without
building unwanted corridor feature lines.
In the Toolspace Prospector, Right-click the code set style to edit XS Sheets - Mainline stage 2
In the Codes tab, change the label style of that Daylight point code to <none>.
The MarkPoint subassembly is found in Tool Palettes... Civil Imperial Subassemblies Generic
MarkPoint. Click the subassembly to select it and click the location on the assembly in the file where
the label is to be placed.
Then select the subassembly and change the Point Code of the MarkPoint subassembly to the
style of label desired. In this example, ElevOff000 for labels on the right side and ElevOff180 for
labels on the left side.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
2:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-006.mp4
130.077.006
Create and use custom marker label style in code set style
This method is good if the provided elevation/offset labels do not meet labeling needs.
Similar to creating custom code set style, custom marker label styles can be created by copying
standard marker label styles and modifying them. These styles can then be applied to point and link
codes in a custom code set style.
Label styles are found in Toolspace... Settings tab Multipurpose styles Label styles Marker.
Click a style that is very similar to what you want, right-click, click "Copy" to make a custom label
style.
4:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-007.mp4
130.077.007
This method is good if only a few labels need to be modified in a section view group. If more than 10-20
labels need to be modified in the same way, methods that can modify multiple labels at once should be
considered.
Dragging a label
A single automatic label can be selected in a section view with a Ctrl+Click. Once selected, a blue grip
will appear that can be dragged to a more visible location.
7/3/2015
** TIP ** Be careful of objects snaps (osnaps) when dragging labels. To avoid snapping to grid lines or
surface links, either turn osnaps off (F3 toggle on/off) or temporarily override osnaps with Shift+Right
Click.
Change a label style or visibility
Selecting an automatic label to change its style or visibility is different than dragging it. Click on the
entire label set to select it. Then right-click over the label to be changed.
From the Label Properties dialog box, the style, flip, and visibility of the label can be changed.
** WARNING ** Once a label is made invisible, it cannot be selected for editing. To retrieve the label:
Click the section view labels to select them
Right-click, click "Edit Corridor Section Properties"
Click the "Codes" tab and click the "Reset Labels" button. Click "OK" button.
This will reset all of the labels for the section view.
3:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-077-008.mp4
130.077.008
This method is good if only a few labels need to be modified in a section view group and the corridor is
no longer changing. If more than 10-20 labels need to be created in the same way, using the MarkPoint
sub in the corridor assemblies should be considered.
Click on the section view labels to select them. Labels can then be added from the contextual ribbon.
7/3/2015
Manual labels can be dragged and changed with standard grips similar to automatic labels. In addition,
manual labels can be moved. The diamond grip moves the point being labeled. The square grip drags
and rotates the label.
** WARNING ** Manual labels that are moved do not stay dynamic to the corridor.
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
24:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-001.mp4
130.080.001
130.080.002
25:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-003.mp4
130.080.003
6:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-080-004.mp4
7/3/2015
130.080.004
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
130.090.001
9:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-002.mp4
130.090.002
Create DWG
11:31 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-003.mp4
130.090.003
Create matchlines 1
7:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-004.mp4
130.090.004
Create matchlines 2
10:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-005.mp4
130.090.005
6:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-006.mp4
130.090.006
6:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-007.mp4
130.090.007
8:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-008.mp4
130.090.008
Assign materials 1
1:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-009.mp4
130.090.009
Assign materials 2
7:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-010.mp4
130.090.010
Create reports
6:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-011.mp4
130.090.011
12:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-012.mp4
130.090.012
6:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-013.mp4
130.090.013
6:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-014.mp4
130.090.014
15:59 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/130/130-090-015.mp4
130.090.015
Section updated:
10/1/2012
14:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-010-001.mp4
140.010.001
Section updated:
10/1/2012
7/3/2015
21:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-020-001.mp4
140.020.001
Insert PI
Select parcel line
Identify location of added PI
Delete PI
Select parcel line
PI nearest to cursor will highlight left-click
Delete Sub-entity
Delete lines
Opens area, could destroy parcels
Parcel Union
Home...Create Design...Parcel...Parcel Creation Tools
Toolbar button just right of center
First select Destination parcel
Second select the parcel to dissolve into the destination
You may need to Delete Sub-entities to clean up leftover boundaries
Area Label
Line and Curve Labels
Single or multiple line/curve labels
Tag labels
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
7:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-030-001.mp4
140.030.001
Civil 3D Sites
A site is a container for related data.
Parcels can only be created in sites.
There can be multiple sites in one file or project.
Sites Contain
Name
Description
Alignment (can exist outside of a site)
Feature Lines
Parcels
Parcels and alignments within the same site will affect each other.
No two parcels can occupy the same space, separate them by site or file.
Existing parcels
Proposed parcels
Easement parcels
Alignments created in a site with parcels will automatically split the parcels.
Proposed right-of-way lines in the proposed parcels site
Civil 3D Parcel Properties
Parcel Properties Include:
Name (Limited manual control)
Description
Style
Labels
Area
Segments
User Defined Properties
Civil 3D Parcel User Defined Properties
Set Manually
Parcel Number (Name and Schedule of Lands & Interests SLI)
Parcel Address
Parcel Tax ID
WisDOT Specific
Owners Name (SLI)
Volume/Page/Document Number
Utility Name
Utility Volume/Page/Document Number
Existing Right-of-way (SLI)
Interest Required (SLI)
Custom macro to copy
Civil 3D Ultimate Right-of-way
In order to display right-of-way on some sheets (such as cross sections), an ultimate right-of-way alignment must
be created and shared.
The ultimate right-of-way will follow existing and proposed right-of-way lines to make a consecutive line that
can be projected on sheets.
Not in a Site
Alignment(s) data shortcut
WisDOT Drawing File Names and File Management
Project folder (\Lan Drive\C3D\ProjectIDFolder\RW)
Standard Names (FDM 15-5-3)
Rwex.DWG
Rwpl.DWG
Rwpr.DWG
Others
Rwgis.DWG (imported GIS data)
Rwsec.DWG (section lines)
WisDOT Standards
Template WisDOT12.DWT (\Templates\USWI)
Object Styles
Label Styles
Command settings
Layers and Symbology
Site naming - name them what they are:
ROW
Easements
Parcels (automatic) parcel number
Alignments
RWLR# - Right-of-way, left or right, number = RWL4
URWLR# - Ultimate ROW, left or right, number = URWL2
Parcels Need to Know!!!
Sites! No two parcels can occupy the same space and alignments will affect parcels!
Parcels
Must be closed areas or they will not act as a parcel
Parcel areas that over lap will create a third parcel
Select parcels by the area label, the default display is parcel number
Parcels cannot be graphically split and count as one (properties split by highway)
7/3/2015
Section updated:
3/19/2013
140.040.001
7/3/2015
8:05 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-040-002.mp4
140.040.002
Selection Cycling
Turn in the Selection Cycling option at the right end of the status buttons.
Hover the cursor pick-box over the alignment. A blue double box glyph will appear to indicate selection cycling is
on. Left click.
A selection cycling box will open with a list of all of the objects in that selection. Click on the alignment option.
140.040.003
7/3/2015
Section updated:
3/19/2013
140.050.000
140.050.001
Workflow outline
7/3/2015
7/3/2015
140.050.002
7/3/2015
140.050.003
7/3/2015
7/3/2015
140.050.004
7/3/2015
Type - Miscellaneous.
Site None
Alignment Style RW Ultimate
Alignment Layer P_RW-Ultimate
Alignment Label Set - _No Labels
Click Ok
Alignment Layout Tools toolbar
Draw Tangent Tangent (No Curves)
Hint: Use Endpoint Snaps to snap to each vertex.
Trace Existing ROW linework until it meets the Proposed ROW Alignment, then trace the Proposed
ROW Alignment until it meets back up with the Existing ROW linework, then trace the existing ROW
linework to the end.
Save your drawing.
140.050.005
7/3/2015
140.050.006
7/3/2015
140.050.007
7/3/2015
Section updated:
3/19/2013
7/3/2015
140.060.001
Browse to the location of the project folder 12345678. For this exercise it is in the WisDOT Design C3D
folder.
Click and drag the folder for the project 12345678 into the left shortcut bar in the Open Dialog.
Click on the newly made shortcut.
Expand the RW folder.
Open the Takings Parcels.dwg
Create Sheets
In the Output ribbon select the Create Sheets button.
Select the proper View Frame Group.
Select number of layouts per new drawing, and set this to 1.
Change the layout name to 0401<next counter>.
Check the layout name template and check the name counter is set to 1.
In the Sheet Set Option you MUST select Add to Existing Sheet Set.
Select the ellipsis to choose the sheet set.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Browse to the project shortcut then to the Sheets Plan folder planproduction.dst.
Change the sheet location to the RW folder of the project.
The Sheet File name needs to be changed to 0401 and the suffix to _rp.
Click Create Sheets. Click OK to save the file during this process.
Plotting Options
Single Sheet Plotting
The plat is NOT ready for printing yet. There are labels that need to be placed.
If you need to plot this single sheet, go to the Quick Access Toolbar and choose the plot icon.
Alternatively, you can right lick on the layout tab and choose Plot.
Alternatively, you can go into the Sheet Set Manager (type SSM at the command line) and right-click on the name
of the single layout tab and choose Publish to PDF.
Section updated:
3/19/2013
140.070.001
7/3/2015
140.070.002
7/3/2015
140.070.003
Adjusting Labels
Position the Alignment Geometry Labels
Click on the alignment geometry label.
Select on the square grip point to drag the label away from the label layout location
Fix the Drawing Scale to What the Plat Page to the Plotting Scale
Set the Drawing Scale to Analyze Label Placement
In the lower right select on the drawing scale
Set the scale to 1 = 200
7/3/2015
Dragging Options
To move the label along the line
Left click on the label
Select the diamond grip point and slide the label along the line segment
To drag the label from the line
Left click on the label
Select the square grip point and drag it to a more appropriate location.
You may need to change the dragged style to one that supports a leader line
Right click Label Properties
Line Label Styles
Change the style to RW Bearing Distance Horizontal with Leader
Resizing Text
To resize the label to better fit a congested area:
Left click on the label
Right-click and choose Label Properties
Choose Label Style Options
Select Label RW Distance Over Bearing 100
140.070.004
7/3/2015
Sorting by column
Select on the table, right-click and choose Edit Table Style
Data Properties tab.
Turn on Sort Data By, Column 1 (or whichever is appropriate).
140.070.005
140.070.006
7/3/2015
140.070.007
Draw a Leader Between the Section Corner and the Traverse Tie-in Point.
Start the polyline command.
Draw a polyline from the representative section corner, down below the section line, toward the traverse tie-in,
then angled back to end at the traverse tie-in point.
7/3/2015
140.070.008
140.070.009
7/3/2015
140.070.010
7/3/2015
140.070.011
7/3/2015
140.070.012
Utility Labels
Attach the Utilities XREF
Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach.
Project folder, BaseData folder, Survey folder, Utilities folder.
Select the CTHT Utilities drawing.
Attachment type, and relative path.
Section updated:
9/23/2014
7/3/2015
Developed in C3D14
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/140/140-080-proj-dataset.zip
7:29 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-080-001.mp4
140.080.001
140.080.002
7/3/2015
140.080.003
7/3/2015
4:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-080-004.mp4
140.080.004
Section updated:
9/23/2014
Developed in C3D14
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/140/140-090-proj-dataset.zip
13:38 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-090-001.mp4
140.090.001
7/3/2015
140.090.002
7/3/2015
Provide the Starting Point by snapping to the intersection of the section lines.
Enter quadrant 4, shift rt. click select Nearest, select easterly section line, and distance 95.03
Enter quadrant 3, shift rt. click select Node select pin for bearing, shift rt. click select Node select pin for
distance to Point of beginning (POB).
Enter and edit the Plat Data
Select correct layer
Home tab of the ribbon, Layers panel, Layer Manager. (or type Layer at the command line)
Select E_RW_CSM.
Start Line command
Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel, Line drop down, Create line by bearing.
Provide the Starting Point by snapping to the POB.
Enter quadrant 3, bearing 44.4531, and distance 133.71
Escape out of the current command select previously drawn line grab endpoint vertex and
stretch it back
to the section line.
Start line by bearing command, select the endpoint of previous line
Enter quadrant 4, bearing 89.5822, and distance 505.05
Enter quadrant 1, bearing 00.0207, and distance 1321.10
Enter quadrant 1, bearing 89.5735, and distance 593.00
Enter quadrant 2, bearing 00.0406, and distance 718.58
Enter quadrant 2, bearing 00.3037, and distance 508.25
4:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/140/140-090-003.mp4
140.090.003
Section updated:
7/1/2010
7/3/2015
12:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-010-001.mp4
150.010.001
Cutout File
References
View Frames
Match Lines
Sheet File
Data Reference
Cutout X-Referenced
Layout
Map 3D 2010 Map Book Wizard
Used with sheets placed in a grid.
Cross Section Automatic Sheet Creation:
Sheet File
Data Reference
X-Referenced
Layouts
7/3/2015
Always attach the data reference for the vertical profile to follow first, you cant set or change this later. If you
attached the existing ground profile first, your profile view will center on the existing instead of the proposed!
Naming and descriptions, use something that will make sense to any users (including yourself months from now).
All sheet sets are not created equal, always create a new sheet set through the wizards.
Section updated:
7/1/2011
7/3/2015
150.020.001
150.020.002
Toolspace...Data Shortcuts, right click "4th Ave" alignment and click Open Source Drawing.
Annotate alignments and profile by adding annotation to Description.
Right-click on either object and click Properties.
Click on the Information tab and enter the annotation in the Description box.
1:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-003.mp4
150.020.003
2:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-004.mp4
150.020.004
2:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-005.mp4
150.020.005
1:35 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-006.mp4
7/3/2015
150.020.007
Create View Frame Group - Output tab...Plan Production ribbon...Create View Frames button.
Create View Frames - Alignment dialog...
Alignment
Alignment "4thAve"
Station Range "Automatic". Click Next.
Sheets
Sheet Settings "Plan and Profile"
Template "wisdot10-pp40.dwt|PlanProf 1 IN 40 FT". Click Next.
View Frame Group
Name "0502 Fourth Ave"
View Frame Name "VF - 0502<[Next Counter]>". Click Next.
Under Match Lines
Verify values and click Next.
Click "Create View Frames".
1:42 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-008.mp4
150.020.008
4:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-020-009.mp4
150.020.009
7/3/2015
150.020.010
Results
View Frames automate the creation of sheets, but do not provide a live link to them.
Changing view frame location will probably mean re-creating sheets.
Profile views split at matchline. No overlap. Overlap can be achieved by changing the station range. However,
alignment of plan and profile views may not be exact.
Section updated:
7/1/2011
3:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-040-001.mp4
150.040.001
*** WARNING *** This exercise should only be used with Civil 3D 2010. An improved workflow for creating cross
sections can be found at 190.010
Delete project data and download and unzip this exercise.
Create plan and profile sheets with annotation
Create a sheet set file.
View tab...Palettes ribbon...Sheet Set Manager button.
In Sheet List, right click down arrow, click "New Sheet Set..."
Begin - create a sheet set using an example sheet set. Click Next.
Sheet Set Example - Select a sheet set to use as an example: planproduction. Click Next.
Sheet Set Details - Name of new sheet set: "090101", Description: "STH 25", Store sheet set data file
(.dst) here: "C:\WisDOT\design\c3d\12345678\SheetsPlan, Click Sheet Set Properties.
2:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-040-002.mp4
150.040.002
3:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-040-003.mp4
150.040.003
Freeze all unnecessary corridor layers - This will eliminate a lot of unneeded file space in your plot.
Home tab... Layers ribbon... Layers Properties button
Click XREF "Corridor-STH25-4thAve"
Select layers "Corridor-STH25-4thAve|P_XS-Base" and "Corridor-STH25-4thAve|P_XS_Text"
Right-click and click "Invert Selection"
Click Freeze column to freeze for the rest of the layers
Close Layer Properties dialog
3:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-040-004.mp4
150.040.004
7/3/2015
150.040.005
150.040.006
Section updated:
4/10/2013
150.050.001
*Note* - This exercise creates a new file in a project folder. There are no connections to this file and the rest of the
project, so an exercise project dataset is not included. Save the file in an existing training project.
Starting a Title Sheet
Start the file with the wisdot12-SHT10.dwt
Menu Browser New
USWI folder PlanProduction folder Title folder
Save the started file to the proper directory
Menu Browser Save As
Project Folder SheetsPlan
Name the title sheet 010101_ti.dwg
14:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-050-002.mp4
150.050.002
Chippewa.pdf
Attaching a Location Sketch
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
150.050.003
7/3/2015
Lock the viewport. Next to the scale list, click the padlock icon.
150.050.004
7/3/2015
150.050.005
7/3/2015
In the Home tab of the ribbon, Palettes panel, click the Palettes panel pull-down. Select the Sheet Set icon. Or
type SSM at the command line.
In the Sheet Set Manager tool palette, at the top click the OPEN drop down.
Select Open from this location.
Browse to the project folder, SheetsPlan folder. Select the planproduction.dst file.
Section updated:
7/1/2010
Section updated:
7/1/2010
Section updated:
7/1/2010
Section updated:
5/3/2013
3:43 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-060-001.mp4
150.060.001
Printing
150.070.001
150.080.001
150.090.001
7/3/2015
Design Center is a tool we will use extensively in this module. Design center is a tool that will allow you to move
items from a source drawing to your current drawing.
Many types of base ACAD elements can be moved between drawings using Design Center:
Blocks
Text Styles
Annotation Styles
Layout tabs
Table Styles
Layers
Multileader Styles
Linetypes
How Design Center Works
Design center acts like a special version of Windows Explorer. On the left, you will see drives, folders and files that
you can browse to. What makes Design Center different is that it will only show you AutoCAD DWG and DWT
files. Once you find the file you are looking for, you can browse into the file to view blocks, layers, layouts, etc.
Create a Favorites List in Design Center
Since some files will be difficult to locate, you can add paths to the favorites list. Right-click the directory you wish
to add, and select Add to favorites.
In this module we will use design center to select blocks representing construction details and layouts.
150.090.002
7/3/2015
8. Start the Hatch command, located on the Home tab > Draw panel.
1. In the Hatch Creation Contextual tab, set the pattern to AR-CONC.
2. Set the scale to 0.1
3. Click in the area formed between the two rectangles and press ESC to complete the command.
9. Start the offset command.
1. Offset the outside line 0.5 to the inside. Press escape to complete the command.
10. Select the new line and right-click.
11. Click Properties from the right-click menu.
12. Change the lineweight from Bylayer to 0.40 mm.
13. Verify that you have polar tracking turned on, since you will need it to change the shape of the new thick
rectangle.
1. Click the skinny grip at the center-bottom of the polyline.
2. Push straight up until you see the green polar tracking line.
3. Key-in a distance of 1.17 and press enter.
14. On the Home tab > Modify panel, click Explode.
15. Use the offset command to offset the horizontal lines 0.5 from bottom to top.
1. Hint: Use the Multiple option in the offset command to save clicks as you copy the lines for the
grate.
16. Use the offset command again to offset one of the vertical bars 2.75
17. Select all of the inside bars for the grate.
1. There should be 9 lines selected in total.
2. Open AutoCAD properties if you closed it earlier.
3. Change the lineweight to 0.30 mm.
4. Press escape to complete the command.
Text
18. On the Annotate Tab > Text Panel, set the current text style to 175.
19. Click the Multiline Text tool.
20. When prompted, click to create an imaginary rectangle representing the text box. It doesnt matter exactly
where you place this, as we will position it in a later step.
21. In the Text Editor Contextual tab:
1. Turn on the Underline formatting.
2. Set the Justification to Top Center.
22. Key-in BOX CULVERT GRATE DETAIL
23. Click Close Text Editor to complete the command.(Do not press escape.)
24. Use Properties to set the lineweight to 0.35.
25. Use Object snap tracking (using the midpoint OSNAP) to place the text centered at the bottom of the box
culvert.
Multileaders
26. On the Annotate tab > Leaders panel, verify that 140 DOT is the active style.
27. Start the Multileader command and click to place the first multileader at the outer grate (one of the thicker
lines).
1. Click a second time to set the landing location.
2. Type in 1" STANDARD PIPE FRAME OR 1" ROD
3. Use the symbol menu in the Text Editor to get the diameter symbol to appear.
4. Click Close Text Editor to complete the multileader.
28. Start the multileader command and click to place the arrowhead near one of the thinner, inner grate lines.
1. Click a second time to set the landing location.
2. Type in 0.8" STANDARD PIPE 6 O.C.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
150.090.003
Getting Started
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercises, continue working from the drawing you started in
exercise 150-090-001. Otherwise, open up the file 021001_CD.dwg from your class files.
2. Verify your drawing settings before continuing:
1. Set your current layer to P_MISC_CONSTD
2. Set your annotative scale to 1IN:10FT
Open Design Center
3. Open Design Center. (HINT: You can type DC <enter>at the command line or click the icon from the Home
tab > Palettes panel.)
4. On the left side of design center, browse to the following path:
1. On Windows 7: C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu\Data\Symbols\USWI\Construction Details
2. On Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All User\Application Data\ Autodesk\C3D 2012\enu
\Data\Symbols\USWI\Construction Details
3. Once you have located the Construction Details folder, right-click and select Add to Favorites so will not
have to browse to this location in the future.
150.090.004
7/3/2015
150.090.005
7/3/2015
Section updated:
5/3/2013
150.100.001
150.100.002
7/3/2015
7/3/2015
17:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-100-003.mp4
7/3/2015
22:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-100-004.mp4
150.100.004
7/3/2015
21:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-100-005.mp4
150.100.005
Layout preparation
Work with Layout Tabs
1. If you successfully completed the previous exercises, continue working from the drawing. Otherwise, open
up the file 020301d_TS.dwg from your class files.
2. Verify your drawing settings before continuing:
1. Set your current layer to P_MISC_TYPS
2. Set your annotative scale to 1IN:10FT
3. Switch to the layout tab labeled 020301_TS.
4. Double click the text items to modify titleblock information.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
13:50 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-100-006.mp4
150.100.006
Plotting
Sheetset Manager vs Publish Command
Plot/Print
The terms plot and print are used interchangeably throughout AutoCAD lingo. The Plot and Print commands
usually refer to creating a single, one-off print from either modelspace or from a layout. If you had many pages to
print, this would be extremely tedious!
Both Sheetset manager and the Publish command will plot multiple pages at once. In both cases, you have the
ability to print directly to a printer, or PDF file.
Always Print to PDF First
Printing to a PDF file is your best option for several reasons:
1. If something is incorrect on the page or the plot, the PDF will reflect the problem. You will save paper and
ink by catching problems in the PDF!
2. Creating a PDF is much quicker than plotting to a printer.
3. Creating a PDF is less likely to cause performance or crashing issues.
Sheetset/Publish
The advantage of the Sheetset manager is that the listing of related pages is saved to a DST file. Ideally, all
layouts related to a project will get added to the sheetset manager for that file. For example, for a completed
project cross-sections, profiles, construction details and typical sections can all be seen in the sheet set listing.
Additional Plotting Information
1. Open the file 020301d_CD.dwg. Even if you have completed previous exercises, additional tabs have been
set up for you to experiment with.
Open Sheetset Manager
2. Click the sheetset manager pulldown and select Open.
3. Browse to the SheetsPlan folder and select PlanProduction.dst.
The top of the sheetset manager should show the name of the sheetset as ProjectSheetData.
4. Right-click the tab and select Import Layout as Sheet
Working with Multiple Layout Tabs
5. Select the tab 020301_CD.
6. Hold down the shift key on your keyboard while selecting 020303_CD.
Even though it is very subtle, all 6 tabs will be selected.
7. Right-click on one of the tabs and select Add Layout to Sheet.
8. Click Import Checked.
Similar to the previous exercise all sheets will be added to the sheetset manager.
9. Right-click the tabs again.
This time, select Publish selected Layouts.
Section updated:
3/10/2014
7/3/2015
150.110.001
16:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-110-002.mp4
150.110.002
7/3/2015
7/3/2015
150.110.003
7/3/2015
150.110.004
7/3/2015
Section updated:
3/10/2014
150.120.001
7/3/2015
150.120.002
7/3/2015
150.120.003
7/3/2015
Section updated:
9/23/2014
Developed in C3D14
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/150/150-130-proj-dataset.zip
8:32 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-130-001.mp4
150.130.001
150.130.002
7/3/2015
150.130.003
14:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-130-004.mp4
150.130.004
7/3/2015
Section updated:
9/23/2014
Developed in C3D14
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/150/150-140-proj-dataset.zip
9:06 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-140-001.mp4
150.140.001
7/3/2015
Click OK.
Select the PT label, Click the delete button.
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, under Data Shortcuts, Alignments, Centerline Alignments
Right-click on STH25BestFit and choose Create Reference
Under Description enter STH25, choose 1IN 50FT- Ticks100Major:50Minor[DESC] for the label set.
Click Ok.
Hint: Toggle off show and hide Lineweight to see the lines as all same thickness/weight
In the Toolspace, Prospector tab, under Data Shortcuts, View Frame Groups
Right-click on STH25BestFit and choose Create Reference
Under View frame style select Standard,
View frame label style select VF Name,
Match line style select _No Display,
Match line labels can be default
Select STH25BestFit for the alignment.
Click Ok.
Xref Edgelines File
Attach the Edgelines Files by going to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel, Attach icon.
Browse to the Projects Edgelines folder.
Select the Edgelines.dwg
Set the Reference Type to Overlay
Set the Path Type to Relative
Set the Insertion Point XY and Z to 0s
Set the Scale to 1
Set the Rotation to 0
Zoom Extents (double click mouse wheel) to see the file location
Hint: Use NCOPY to bring in all pavement linework from XREF.
15:24 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-140-002.mp4
150.140.002
7/3/2015
150.140.003
24:07 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-140-004.mp4
150.140.004
Create Sheets
In the Output tab click Create Sheets, On the Create Sheets View Frame Group and Layouts dialog box
Under View frame group select STH25BestFit
View frame range select Selection, click Choose View Frames
In the Select View Frames dialog box click the green box icon to select view frame from drawing
Click Ok
Select All layouts in the current drawing
Click next
Click Create Sheets; click ok to save the current drawing.
Insert Radius Dimensions
On the Annotate Tab of the ribbon Dimension panel,
Select Radius from the Dimension dropdown and DOT 140 RADIUS from the Style dropdown
Insert Radius dimensions as needed.
Select Arc end points on Curb and Gutter
Create Joint Lines
On the Home Tab of the ribbon Layers panel,
Select the layer dropdown and select the P_RDWY_Joint layer to be current
On the Home tab of the ribbon, Draw panel, select polyline command,
Draw polylines to represent Joints marks
On the Home tab of the ribbon, Modify panel, select Offset command, key in a distance,
select side to be offset to, click enter twice to start the offset command again
Key in new distance, select side, and repeat until all joint lines are complete.
Hint: Use Layer Isolate command to only show the layers needed
Hint: Use trim and extends command to clean up joint lines.
Hint: Use Layer un-isolate command to bring back the previous layers
Insert Joint Dimensions
On the Annotate Tab of the ribbon Dimension panel,
Select Aligned from the Dimension dropdown and DOT 140 Plan Joints_NoDimLines from the Style
Dropdown, Insert Joint dimensions as needed.
Select joint end points on joint lines
Hint: Use DIMCONTINUE command to speed the dimension process up.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Select Aligned from the Dimension dropdown and DOT 140 Plan Joints from the Style Dropdown,
Insert Joint dimensions as needed.
Select joint end points on joint lines.
Section updated:
9/23/2014
Developed in C3D14
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/150/150-150-proj-dataset.zip
7:36 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-150-001.mp4
150.150.001
24:55 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-150-002.mp4
7/3/2015
In the home tab of the ribbon, create ground data panel, Points dropdown, Select Point Creation Tools
Click the chevron to expand the Create Points Properties,
Change the Default Layer to P_RDWY_Text_Grades
Expand Points Creation, Default Description to PAV,
Prompt for Elevations to Automatic
Prompt For Point Names to Manual
Prompt for Description to None
Expand Default Styles; change Point Style to P PM Pavement Marker Radius,
Point Label Style to Point Name Circled
Expand Default Name Format, Change Point Name Template to PAV<[Next Counter(CP)]>
Set Starting Number to 1.
Close the chevron.
On the Create Points Toolbar, Miscellaneous Point dropdown, select Manual Point
Select Curb and gutter arc endpoints and radius points.
Pick at the taper points on the Pavement lines.
Select a Point, on the contextual ribbon, Modify panel select Elevations from Surface,
Select STH25-Refinement-Top for the surface,
Type in an A for all the points.
Generate Point Data for Point Tables (Macro)
In the Toolspace, Toolbox, expand WisDOT Toolbox, expand WisDOT Macros,
Rt. click Point-Station Offset to UDP, select execute
In the WisDOT Points Station-Offset UDP dialog box pick Select Points and check Create Point Group
Enter Radius Points, into the Point Group name box
Select STH25BestFit in the Alignment dropdown
Select as Alignment 1,
Click apply and select all the radius points, click enter
In the WisDOT Points Station-Offset UDP dialog box pick Point Group
Select Radius Points as the point group,
Select 4thAve in the Alignment dropdown
Select as Alignment 2,
Click apply.
In the Toolspace, Prospector, expand point Groups, select Radius Points, Rt click Edit points
Panorama opens to look at the info created for the point table that will be created.
Create Point Tables
In the Annotate tab of the ribbon, Labels & Tables Panel select add tables dropdown, select Add Point table
On the Point Table Creation dialog box under the Table style dropdown
Select STA OFF STA OFF NE RADIUS
Click icon next to no point group selected and select Radius Points point group, click ok
Click ok, pick spot for table to reside.
Hint: Rerun Macro with overwrite checked to see alignment station DESC changes.
Insert Radius Dimensions
On the Annotate Tab of the ribbon Dimension panel,
Select Radius from the Dimension dropdown and DOT 140 RADIUS from the Style dropdown
Insert Radius dimensions as needed.
Select Arc end points on Curb and Gutter
Hint: Toggle ANNOAUTOSCALE Icon to add scale of sheet.
Edit Point Info for Tables
In the Toolspace, Prospector, Expand Point Groups, Rt click Radius Points, Select Edit Points,
Panorama opens with point editor, locate the radius column, Add radius lengths to points
17:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-150-003.mp4
150.150.003
Create Sheets
In the Output tab click Create Sheets, On the Create Sheets View Frame Group and Layouts dialog box
Under View frame group select STH25BestFit-40Scale
For View frame range select Selection, click Choose View Frames
In the Select View Frames dialog box click the green box icon to select view frame from drawing
Click Ok
Select all layouts in the current drawing
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Section updated:
9/23/2014
Developed in C3D14
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/150/150-160-proj-dataset.zip
4:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-001.mp4
150.160.001
11:11 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-002.mp4
150.160.002
7/3/2015
In the Quick Access toolbar select the NEW drawing file icon.
In the Menu Browser select Save As.
Browse to the folder path 87654321 Sheets Plan
Save this new file as 022501-ss.dwg.
In the toolspace, Prospector tab, under the Data Shortcuts header:
Expand surfaces.
Right-click on Surface Exist and choose Create Reference.
In the Style field click on the style name, then select the ellipsis button.
Set the style settings as No Display and click OK.
Zoom extents so you are near the project.
Repeat this for the surfaces:
Cmbn-Exist-USGS-Top
Crdr-Commercial-PipeDatum
Ex-USGS-DEM
Exist
Rfnt-Commercial-Datum
Rfnt-Commercial-Top
Expand Alignments, and expand Centerline type.
Right-click AlexanderDr and choose Create Reference.
Set the Label Set to 1IN 100FT-Ticks 200' Major:100' Minor-NoPCPT
Click OK to create the reference.
Repeat this process for the alignments:
CarriageDr,
CastleOakDr,
Commercial
OldeSchoolRd,
RegentPl,
SParkAve.
Expand Pipe Networks.
Right-click on Storm-10yr and choose Create Reference.
Leave all of the defaults (including the parts list) and click OK.
If there is any other data that you need data referenced into the file repeat these steps for the appropriate objects.
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel select Attach.
Browse to 87654321/Design/Edgelines/Pavt.dwg and click Open.
Make sure Xref Attach dialog is set to:
Attachment Type: Overlay.
Path Type: Relative.
Click Ok.
In the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference panel select Attach.
Browse to 87654321/BaseData/Survey/Topo-EX_Survey.dwg and click Open.
Make sure Xref Attach dialog is set to:
Attachment Type: Overlay.
Path Type: Relative.
Click Ok.
If there are any other dwg files that need to be XREFd into this file go to the Insert tab of the ribbon, Reference
panel, and click Attach.
6:12 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-003.mp4
150.160.003
150.160.004
9:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-005.mp4
150.160.005
7/3/2015
For the Layout Creation option, select the All Layouts in the Current Drawing. This is important, and will
not work with a different setting.
For the Layout Name, select the layout name template button to the right.
In the Name field add the sheet name 0225
In the Name Field, place the cursor immediately after the name 0225 (no space between) then
click the Insert button to add the <[Next Counter]> to the name.
Make sure the Number Style is set to 01,02,03
Make sure the Starting number is correct. In this case it should be 1.
Click OK.
Click Next.
For the Sheet Set select Add to an Existing Sheet Set, and click on the ellipsis button (three dot button)
to the right of this field.
Browse to project 87654321, SheetsPlan folder, and select the 87654321.DST file. Click Open.
At the bottom, select the Sheet File Name icon
In the Name field add the sheet name 0225
In the Name Field, place the cursor immediately after the name 0225 (no space between) then
click the Insert button to add the <[Next Counter]> to the name.
In the Name field, place the cursor immediately after the <Next Counter> and type ss.
Make sure the Number Style is set to 01,02,03
Make sure the Starting number is correct. In this case it should be 1.
Click Next.
In the Other Profile View Options area, click Choose Settings, then click the Profile View Wizard.
On the left side, select the General page.
At the bottom of the page select the Show Offset Profiles By Vertically Stacking Profile
Views to turn this option on.
On the left select the Stacked Profile page.
Number of Stacked Profiles should be switched to 2.
Gap between views should be 0
Set all three styles to Storm Sewer.
Click Next.
With the Select Stacked View to Specify Options set to Bottom View, make sure there
is nothing set to Draw.
With the Select Stacked View to Specify Options set to Top View, make sure the Trunk
7-1 profile is set to Draw, the Style is set to PROF Existing, and the Labels are set to
_No Labels. Click Next.
In the Pipe/Pressure Pipe Networks page:
Change the Stacked Profile to Top
Click the Select From Screen icon.
Type P at the command line for individual parts
Left-click each pipe and structure that is part of the trunk sewer and belongs
in the trunk profile view.
Click <ENTER> to end the selection set.
Click Finish for the dialog box. This will return you to the Create Sheets Wizard.
Click Create Sheets. Click OK to save the file.
Select a location to the east of the project to place the profile views. Close the Panorama Event
Viewer if it opens.
8:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-006.mp4
150.160.006
7/3/2015
150.160.007
7/3/2015
5:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-008.mp4
150.160.008
10:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-160-009.mp4
150.160.009
150.160.010
7/3/2015
150.160.011
Section updated:
4/13/2015
2:23 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-170-001.mp4
150.170.001
5:49 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-170-002.mp4
7/3/2015
Select the block, select the down arrow grip (visibility state)
Blocks contain multiple visibility states. Each visibility state changes the layer (inside the block definition) and the
color so to plot correctly.
Sign Blocks in Paper Space
Sign blocks should be placed in paper space as they are scaled correctly and can be manipulated on each sheet
individually
Sign Blocks in Model Space
Sign blocks can be placed in paper space. This option come with several drawbacks including rotation and
placement.
4:26 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-170-003.mp4
150.170.003
Section updated:
4/13/2015
150.180.001
10:17 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-180-002.mp4
150.180.002
7/3/2015
5:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-180-003.mp4
150.180.003
Section updated:
4/13/2015
3:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-190-001.mp4
150.190.001
2:41 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-190-002.mp4
150.190.002
3:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/150/150-190-003.mp4
7/3/2015
Select the layer dropdown and select the P_SGN layer to be current
Hint: select the Permanent Signs filter to sort out unnecessary layers
Switch to Layout tab 026008-s1
On the Home tab of the ribbon, Palettes panel, select Tool Palettes (Ctrl+3)
Rt click on the gray side bar of the tool palette, select WisDOT Manage, select wissigns,
Select Wis-Signs M tab
Select M1-6, Place on sheet in paper space, select dynamic arrow, select REMOVE-2N,
Double click block to open annotation, type 25 for Value, and click ok.
Copy M1-6, place near new sign location,
Select block, select down arrow, and change to INSTALL-2N
Select Wis-Signs R1-R3 tab
Select R1-1, Place on sheet in paper space, select dynamic arrow, select REMOVE,
Copy R1-1, place near new sign location,
Select block, select down arrow, and change to INSTALL
Section updated:
7/1/2010
Section updated:
7/1/2010
Section updated:
10/1/2012
12:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/160/160-010-001.mp4
160.010.001
Styles
Style Labels
Annotation Labels
Tables
160.020.001
160.020.002
160.030 Working with spatially referenced DWG, image, and GIS files
160.030.001
Assign coordinate system to active DWG and any DWG files to be attached
Click on Application Menu... Drawing Utilities... Drawing Settings.
In the Drawing Settings dialog box, go to the Units and Zone tab.
In the zone area at the bottom of the tab, change the category to "USA, Wisconsin".
Change the available coordinate system to the one desired. Make sure that the units are set correctly.
Click OK.
If other DWG files are to be georeferenced, repeat this process for all DWG used to be used.
Attach DWG
In the Map Task Pane, make sure that Display Manager tab is active.
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Click Data... Add Drawing Data... Attach Source Drawings. This will open the Define/Modify Drawing Set
dialog box.
Click the Attach... button. This will open the Select Drawings to Attach dialog box.
The first time this dialog is used, an alias will need to be set for any drives other than the C drive.
Attaching files
In the Map Task Pane, click Data... Connect To Data... this will open the Data Connect dialog box. This dialog box
provides a number of different data connections to different file types. The one that will be most common will be
Add the Raster Image or Surface
Add SHP Connection
The "Add ArcGIS Connection" is for ESRIs personal geo-database file format (*.gdb). This connection requires
ArcMAP be installed on the computer to work.
7/3/2015
Click the OK button. This will bring back the AddMaptoData dialog. The correct coordinates system should
show up in the main window.
Click the Add to Map button. The contents of the file should show up in model space and also show up in the
Task Pane. Raster images will also show up in the AutoCAD reference dialog.
Section updated:
1/15/2013
If frames are showing up on overlapping attached image or PDFs, the following settings will turn them off:
There are two settings that control frames for images. They are FRAME and IMAGEFRAME.
On the command line type FRAME <enter>, 0 <enter>
If that doesnt shut off the frames , type IMAGEFRAME <enter>, 0 <enter>
That should turn off the frames and set them so they dont plot.
Section updated:
7/1/2010
Section updated:
7/1/2010
Section updated:
7/1/2011
2:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/160/160-040-001.mp4
160.040.001
160.050.001
Exercise
160.060.001
3:16 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/160/160-060-002.mp4
160.060.002
7/3/2015
Section updated:
8/24/2012
7/3/2015
170.010.001
14:30 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-010-002.mp4
170.010.002
170.010.003
9:20 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-010-004.mp4
170.010.004
7/3/2015
170.010.005
4:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-010-006.mp4
170.010.006
7/3/2015
170.010.007
Section updated:
8/24/2012
7/3/2015
170.020.001
170.020.002
16:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-020-003.mp4
170.020.003
WisDOT Feature Line reports and Import Station Offsett Depth file
Reported from Earthwork-STH25BestFit.DWG
Feature Line Report - Offset from Alignment
Summary 0:20
Open Surface-STH25-Refinement.DWG 2:30
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Section updated:
8/26/2012
Section updated:
8/27/2012
Section updated:
1/13/2013
170.030.001
170.030.002
170.050.001
Export Superelevation Transition Data in the Superelevation Tabular Editor to an Excel file
Select the alignment from the drawing
Select Superelevation in the contextual ribbon
Select View Tabular Editor button
The Superelevation Tabular panorama displays all the superelevation transition data for each
curve.
In the panorama select the Export superelevation data button and save the data as a CSV file in the
Construction subfolder of the project.
Review the CSV file data and format in Excel.
4:37 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-050-002.mp4
170.050.002
Section updated:
1/13/2013
170.080.001
7/3/2015
Open or create the drawing that has the project alignment and surface you wish to query the data from, along with
any location reference objects.
From the Toolbox tab on the Toolspace, navigate to Transportation Extension Utilities, expand the Cross Section
list, select Quick Cross Sections, and press Enter to execute the command.
Select the surface (multiple surfaces may be selected) and press the space bar
This tool has two cross section options;
3p, which creates a single cross section by selecting 2 points as the cutting plan, and the last point
to define the direction the cross section is viewed from.
Multiple, option allows the user to create a path for multiple sections by selecting points, then
prompts for frequency, and left and right widths, to create multiple section along the defined path.
Note: The section(s) may be viewed using zoom and pan only.
Notice once the mouse is clicked or a key pressed, the cross section view no longer exists.
The Quick Profile command, under Home, Create Design, Profile, can use the following objects as the cutting
plane to build a cross section; 2D or 3D lines or polylines, Lot lines, feature lines, Survey figures, and a series of
points. This command creates a temporary Profile View and samples selected surfaces.
Select an object listed above as the cutting plane, or select a series of points in the model space.
Select the surfaces to sample, along with a visual style in the dialog.
Select the Profile view Style.
Press OK and pick a point in the drawing area to place the Quick Profile.
Note: the Quick Profile view and surface profiles created do not disappear once the mouse is clicked or a
key pressed. The Quick profile remains as an object until the save drawing command is used.
The elevation data can be extracted from the Quick Profile using the same tools as a profile. Use the
Profile Station and Elevation at Point option in the Inquiry Tool under Profile.
When using an object as the cutting plane, the relationship between the object and the quick profile is dynamic.
This means the object can be moved, stretched, vertices added or subtracted and the quick profile updates the
profiles and view automatically and instantaneously.
2:44 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-080-002.mp4
170.080.002
4:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-080-003.mp4
170.080.003
7/3/2015
When prompt to select section view, chose the section from the list or use the Object Select icon to pick the
section view from the drawing area.
Note: pick the grid or the labels of the section view and not the sections.
Select point by coordinate
Press the Object Select icon next to Point Coordinate to pick the location in the section view, or type the
coordinates into the textbox.
Use the Copy to Clipboard to extract the current data within the Inquiry Tool dialog, to a file. Each data box
can also be extracted independently. Hover over a data box with the cursor then use the mouse-right-click,
Copy to Clipboard option.
To extract elevation from a point on a surface section use the Section Offset and Elevation at Point option by
selecting a surface section in a section view, then select Inquiry on the contextual ribbon.
Select the Section Offset and Elevation at Point as the inquiry type.
When prompt to select the section, chose the section from the list or use the Object Select icon to select the
section from one of the section views.
Note: pick the surface section, not the section view.
Select the offset point in a section view by using the Object Select icon next to Offset and selecting the offset
location in a section view. Once a location in the section view has been picked, typing the offsets into the
textbox will produce elevation data along the selected surface section in that section view.
Note: Select inside a different section view to inquiry elevation information about the same surface section
in a different section view.
A different surface section can be selected at any time, or picked from the list.
Use the Copy to Clipboard to extract the current data within the Inquiry Tool dialog, to a file. Each data box can
also be extracted independently. Hover over a data box with the cursor then use the mouse-right-click, Copy to
Clipboard option.
2:13 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-080-004.mp4
170.080.004
Section updated:
1/13/2013
170.090.001
7/3/2015
reference. This workflow can also be used for almost any earthwork site volume calculations.
Create drawing from template
Create a new drawing using the wisDOT12.dwt template.
Save the drawing.
Creating the Borrow site surface from an SRV file
Ensure the Final SRV file has been placed into the project folder structure.
(Refer to WisDOT project folder structure for recommended folder structure)
The SRV file contains point and break line information that will be used to create a surface.
Run Convert SRV to PNT/FLT macro from the WisDOT toolbox, in the Toolbox tab of the Toolspace.
(The Autocad 2012 VBA Enabler needs to be installed for this macro to run)
Respond No to the save dialog that appears at the end of running the macro.
This macro will build point and Breakline/Fault files with extension PNT and FLT in the same folder
location as the original SRV file. These file can now be used as definitions for a surface.
Create a new surface and name it ACME Borrow Site.
Select the Final Top Border as the surface style.
Add Point file definitions to the surface using PENZD (Space Delimited) file format. Press the Plus
icon/button and select the PNT file.
Select break link to file and OK.
Add Breakline definitions to the surface using the From file option and select the FLT file.
Select break link to file and OK
The ACME Borrow Site surface is created. Zoom extents to see the surface.
Save the drawing.
Create the Existing Surface by creating a Data Reference
Navigate in the Toolspace, on the Prospector tab and expanding the Data Shortcuts collection. Select the
Exist surface under the Surface collection and right-click and select Create Reference.
Select the EX border surface style for best drawing performance and for visual reference.
Save the drawing.
Calculate Borrow Site volume using the Composite Volumes tool
Select Analyze>Volume tool, to create a new volume entry.
Select the Exist surface as the base surface and ACME Borrow Site as the comparison surface to be
used.
Notice the cut and fill volumes shown in the panorama are a calculation and do not represent a volume
surface. This data is not saved with the drawing and must be re-calculated once the Composite Volumes
panorama is closed.
This information can be exported to an xml file by using the export button on the top menu of the
composite volume panorama.
Save the drawing.
Calculate Borrow Site Volume using the Volume Dashboard tool
(This is an add-on for version 2012 and may be downloaded from the Autodesk Subscription Center)
Open the Volume Dashboard from the command line by typing VOLUMEDASHBOARD. This tool can also be
accessed in the Toolspace, Toolbox tab, under the Subscription Extension Manager collection. Expand
Volumes Dashboard Extension for AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 and right-click on Volumes Dashboard for AutoCAD
Civil 3D 2012 and select Execute.
Create a new Volume Surface. Select the Exist surface as the base surface and ACME Borrow Site as the
comparison surface to be used.
Review the cut and fill volumes that are shown in both tabular and graph form on the Dashboard. This
information is derived from a Volume surface. This new volume surface is saved in the drawing.
Generate a Volume Report by selecting the Generate Cut/Fill Report button on the Dashboard.
A report is created for viewing. The information in the html report can be copied and pasted into an excel
worksheet.
Save the drawing.
Calculate Borrow Site volume from Section areas using the Average End-Area Method
Create an Alignment that extends down the middle of the longest direction of the borrow pit surface.
The alignment should extend past the surface area on both ends.
Create a Sample Line Group from Ribbon>Profile & Section Views>Sample Lines
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Section updated:
1/13/2013
30:14 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/170/170-100-001.mp4
170.100.001
This section will demonstrate two ways to obtain final project cut volume(s) information:
Surface Comparison by creating a Volume Surface
Calculate Average End Area Volumes, using sections along a baseline alignment
For this exercise, a final survey was performed after the base/pavement had been placed. This
workflow can also be used for almost any earthwork project volume calculations.
Create a drawing from the template using wisDOT12.dwt.
Save the drawing.
The subgrade and final survey drawings are to be located in the 3DModelDeliverable folder of the
project. Verify that a Data Shortcut has been created of the following surfaces:
Final survey surface
Existing ground surface
Design subgrade surface
Note: If the final survey was completed prior to base and pavement placement, the subgrade
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
surface is not needed and the final survey surface can be used as-is without creating a composite
surface.
Create Data References of the Surfaces
Expand the Surfaces list below Data Shortcuts in the Prospector tab on the Toolspace.
Highlight the existing surface,
Right-click and choose Create Reference.
Use the default name and style settings and press OK.
Repeat the previous steps to create a data reference for the all surface needed
Zoom extents if necessary to see the surfaces.
Create the Final Earthwork Composite Surface
Navigate to Surfaces from the Home ribbon and selecting Create Surface.
Name the composite surface something similar to Final Earthwork Composite
Add Final Survey surface definition to the Final Earthwork Composite surface using the Paste tool
Press Surface on the Modify Ribbon above Ground Data.
This will open the default Surface contextual Ribbon.
From Edit Surface select Paste Surface.
Press the space bar to open the dialog box and select the surfaces from a list.
Note: The first surface to select is the main or base surface, and the second surface is the one
to paste onto the base surface.
Highlight the Final Earthwork Composite surface in the list, as the base surface, then press OK
Highlight the Final Survey surface in the list, as the surface to paste onto the base surface, then
press OK
Add 3DSurfaceModel-Subgrade surface definition to the Final Earthwork Composite surface
Press Surface on the Modify Ribbon.
This will open the default Surface contextual Ribbon.
From Edit Surface select Paste Surface.
Press the space bar to open the dialog box to select the surfaces from a list.
Highlight Final Earthwork Composite surface in the list, as the base surface, then press OK
Highlight 3DSurfaceModel-Subgrade surface in the list, as the surface to paste, then press OK
Surface Comparison by creating a Volume Surface
Calculate Final Earthwork Volume from Surface Comparisons by Creating a TIN Volume Surface
Press Surface on the Home Ribbon, and select Create Surface.
Set the Type to TIN Volume Surface.
Name: Final Earthwork Volume
Select the Existing surface for the Base Surface.
Select the Final Earthwork Composite surface for the Comparison Surface.
Go to the Surface Properties Statistics tab and review the TIN Volume numbers.
Information here may be copied to the clipboard using the right-click menu for comparison with
the Average End Area calculations.
Create Volume Report using the Volume Dashboard Tool
(This is an add-on for version 2012 and may be downloaded from the Autodesk Subscription Center)
Typing VOLUMEDASHBOARD at the command line to show the dialog.
The Volume Dashboard can be accessed in the Toolspace, Toolbox tab, under the Subscription
Extension Manager collection. Expand Volumes Dashboard Extension for AutoCAD Civil 3D
2012 and right-click on Volumes Dashboard for AutoCAD Civil 3D 2012 and select Execute.
Press the Add Volume Surface button.
The first one on the left, and select the Final Earthwork Volume surface.
Select the Final Earthwork Volume surface
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Here you can review the cut and fill volumes that are shown in both tabular and graph form and
generate a Volume Report by selecting the Generate Cut/Fill Report button on the Dashboard.
A report is created for viewing. The information in the html report can be copied and pasted into
an excel worksheet.
Matchline Alignments (for end area method)
Matchline alignments should already exist as part of the design process.
Data reference all the matchline alignments for the project, including any side roads into the
drawing.
Highlight each matchline alignment, one at a time in the Prospector tree, right-click and select
Promote. The matchline alignment should be in the Miscellaneous Alignments collection
Verify that each matchline alignment extends beyond the final survey surface and edit the
alignment to extend if necessary, ensuring that the tangent angle is preserved.
For a tee intersection a left and right matchline alignment should exist as a data shortcut within the
project.
7/3/2015
7/3/2015
Section updated:
8/24/2012
7/3/2015
180.010.001
Introduction
4:40 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-002.mp4
180.010.002
6:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-003.mp4
180.010.003
3:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-004.mp4
180.010.004
3:39 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-005.mp4
180.010.005
3:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-006.mp4
180.010.006
5:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-007.mp4
180.010.007
Interobject awareness
6:08 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-008.mp4
180.010.008
Interobject awareness 2
180.010.009
Read-only DWGs
2:27 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-010.mp4
180.010.010
6:18 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-010-011.mp4
180.010.011
Naming conventions
See naming conventions document.
Section updated:
6/25/2013
180.020.001
General items
The workflow to import CAiCE data deals with many different objects in Civil 3D. It is recommended to have
that training before importing CAiCE data.
CAiCE project needs to be unarchived to import data from it.
If you dont know the naming conventions used on the CAiCE project, look for the metadata document in the
project.
Dont bring in all data all at once. Better to run import process multiple times.
Easier to set layers and styles prior to import rather than fixing them later.
Set active layer before import
For survey surface data, if you have items in their original formats (SRV, PAC, CAiCE points and survey
chains), it is better to bring those items in directly to C3D rather than using the CAiCE DTMs. This is because
the surface comes in as a snapshot and you cant see the items that built the surface.
2:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-002.mp4
180.020.002
4:02 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-003.mp4
180.020.003
5:25 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-004.mp4
180.020.004
7/3/2015
180.020.005
Right-click on the objects or group of objects to be inserted and click Insert into drawing
If points all come in identical, apply point description key set
ToolspacePoint GroupsRight click _All PointsClick Apply Description Keys
Review data
Recommend removing design/plat points from the file
7:58 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-006.mp4
180.020.006
11:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-007.mp4
180.020.007
7/3/2015
Repeat the process with other feature codes (CZ and SI used in exercise). Create a new file from
wisdot12.dwt. Save it as C:\WisDOT\design\c3d-training\180-020-exercise-files\Edgelines-CAS.dwg.
Make sure to set active layer prior to import.
Any geometry chains that are default set to feature lines should be moved to Miscellaneous Alignments.
Feature lines are 3D objects and do not support true curves while geometry chains are 2D and can have
curves. There are also far more styles available for alignments.
Styles and label sets seem to be hardcoded. Select an alignment. Right-click.
Click Select Similar.
Go to Properties window, change style for CZ alignments to AREA Clear Zone.
Select a label set. Right-click.
Click Select Similar. Press Delete.
Repeat for SI, set style to RW Proposed-SlopeIntercepts.
Important to remember
Think about which files you want which objects in. It is far easier to import geometry chains into the correct
file than try to move them later on.
Rename any alignments before creating data shortcuts for them.
5:34 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-008.mp4
180.020.008
3:56 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-009.mp4
180.020.009
7/3/2015
180.020.010
5:54 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/180/180-020-011.mp4
180.020.011
Section updated:
4/18/2012
Section updated:
4/18/2012
7/3/2015
8:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-010-001.mp4
190.010.001
8:04 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-010-002.mp4
190.010.002
Section updated:
11/29/2012
Section updated:
11/29/2012
4:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-030-001.mp4
190.030.001
190.040.001
7/3/2015
Section updated:
11/29/2012
Section updated:
4/18/2012
7/3/2015
26:53 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-050-001.mp4
190.050.001
Superelevation View
Select the corridor, context ribbon, Superelevation button
Create Superelevation View button
Control by station range
Display option for each lane/shoulder line
Color options for each line
Select allows for graphic edits
Diamond grips for station control
Arrow and rectangle grips for slope control
190.060.001
Section updated:
11/29/2012
9:01 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-070-001.mp4
190.070.001
Viewport configuration
Station advance and filtering
Graphic editing no longer locks the entire section
Section updated:
11/29/2012
9:45 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-080-001.mp4
190.080.001
7/3/2015
Section updated:
11/29/2012
7:19 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-090-001.mp4
190.090.001
Section updated:
3/10/2014
Exercise files
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/190/190-exercise-files.zip
7:51 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-100-001.mp4
190.100.001
7/3/2015
Section updated:
3/10/2014
Exercise files
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/190/190-exercise-files.zip
5:28 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-110-001.mp4
190.110.001
Section updated:
3/10/2014
190.120.001
7/3/2015
7/3/2015
Section updated:
3/10/2014
8:09 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-130-001.mp4
190.130.001
Array command now creates a sample array so that you can see the effect of your parameters. Editing is done by
grip points or in the properties panel.
Starting the Rectangular Array Command
Type Array at the command line.
Select objects.
Right-click (or ENTER).
Then choose the type of ARRAY.
OR
The Modify panel lower right corner.
Click the drop down and choose Rectangular.
Select the object to array.
Click <ESC>.
Click on one of the arrayed objects.
Click the top arrow to add rows.
Click the furthest right arrow to add columns.
Click the arrow closest to the origin to change spacing of columns and rows.
Editing the Array
Select an arrayed object to edit.
Right-click and choose Properties.
Type in the number of rows, or the number of columns or the spacing.
Creating a Polar Array
Modify panel, Array drop-down choose Path.
Select a center point for the polar array.
Click the arrow to change the spacing. Click the square grip to change the end of the array going around the polar
array.
Creating a Path Array
Modify panel, Array button drop-down.
Choose the Path Array.
Select the object.
Right-click to end selection.
Select the polyline path.
Select the arrow to adjust the spacing.
Section updated:
3/10/2014
Exercise files
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/190/190-exercise-files.zip
4:52 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-140-001.mp4
190.140.001
7/3/2015
Section updated:
3/10/2014
190.170.001
Provides the ability to target 2D and 3d Polylines, Feature Lines, and Survey Figures in xrefs.
Open the Corridor File
Open command, project folders, BaseData, Corridor-STH25-4thAveXrefTargets.dwg
Attach the Xref
On the insert tab, Attach command, navigate to the projects edgelines folder, select Edgelines.dwg, select open.
On the Attach External Reference dialog box
Reference Type Overlay
Scale unchecked
Insertion point unchecked
Path type Relative path
Rotation unchecked
Click ok.
Working in Corridor Properties
Open the toolspace, prospector, corridors, Rt. click on STH25, select corridor properties
On the parameters tab select the ellipsis in the RG - STH25-Urban-2Lane B4 Intersection region row and
targets column
Under Surfaces
Target Surface for DaylightToROW_RT- Exist
Target Surface for DaylightToROW_LT - Exist
Under Width or Offset Targets
Width Alignment for LaneSE_AOR_RT Varies Select from drawing
Target Alignment ROW Offset for DaylightToROW_RT Select from drawing
Width Alignment for LaneSE_AOR_LT Varies Select from drawing
Target Alignment ROW Offset for DaylightToROW_LT Select from drawing
On the parameters tab select the ellipsis in the RG - STH25-Urban-2Lane After Intersection region row
and targets column
Under Surfaces
Target Surface for DaylightToROW_RT- Exist
Target Surface for DaylightToROW_LT - Exist
Under Width or Offset Targets
Width Alignment for LaneSE_AOR_RT Varies Select by Layer
Target Alignment ROW Offset for DaylightToROW_RT Select by Layer
Width Alignment for LaneSE_AOR_LT Varies Select by Layer
Target Alignment ROW Offset for DaylightToROW_LT Select by Layer
Section updated:
3/10/2014
Exercise files
ftp://ftp.dot.wi.gov/dtsd/bpd/methods/c3d-trn/files/190/190-exercise-files.zip
8:15 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-180-001.mp4
190.180.001
Provides the ability to have a dynamic north arrow and scale bar in your layout which is set to the viewport.
The north arrow once set to the viewport will rotate the viewport to change the model view automatically.
The scale bar once set to the viewport will scale the viewport to change the model view automatically.
Open the File and layout
Open command, project folders, Sheets Other, LayoutToolsTabSheet.dwg
In the tabs (new to 2014) hover over the drawing name, select the layout.
Select Layout 050109
Insert North Arrow
On the Layout Tools Contextual Ribbon Tab, select the North Arrow icon dropdown
select any north arrow in the list
select the viewport to assign the north arrow.
Select the north arrow icon dropdown
Manual last updated:
7/3/2015
Section updated:
3/10/2014
11:22 http://165.189.80.136/dot/c3d-trn/190/190-190-001.mp4
190.190.001
7/3/2015
7/3/2015